User Manual Microwave Links

v e r s i o n 2.8.3

AT283_UMM_E2

Atoll User Manual

2

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Contact Information
Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac France

    

www.forsk.com sales@forsk.com helpdesk@forsk.com +33 (0) 562 74 72 10 +33 (0) 562 74 72 25 +33 (0) 562 74 72 11 sales_us@forsk.com support_us@forsk.com +1 312 674 4846 +1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +1 312 674 4847 www.forsk.com.cn enquiries@forsk.com.cn +86 20 8553 8938 +86 20 8553 8285

Web Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Web Information and enquiries Telephone Fax

Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker Drive Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 USA

   

Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No.66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, People’s Republic of China

   

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual Release AT283_UMM_E2 © Copyright 1997 - 2010 by Forsk The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied under the terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without prior authorisation from Forsk. The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.

About the Atoll User Documentation
The Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear, self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the features that Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enable him to use all of Atoll’s features and functions. The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual contains instructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment and the tools available.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

3

Atoll User Manual

4

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

........................9........................................1 1.............................................................................3......1 1..............4........................................... 15 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs............1..4........................... 18 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map ..............................................4....................................................4 1.........2 1............................. and Points .......................4...... 38 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions...2 1.2 1..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29 Using Zones in the Map Window........................................................4.............................. 20 Display Properties of Objects ....... 19 Moving a Site Using the Mouse .............. 35 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar.........................8 1................................................1........ 38 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format ....2 1.................................................... Lines.............1..................1 1. 34 Adding a Vector Layer ......................................... 29 Using a Filtering Zone......................2 1..........9......................8......................... 1 1..................1............9...........3.......... 25 Working with Maps. 27 Choosing a Scale..................4 1.....2............................... 19 Moving a Site to a Higher Location..................3 1....................4.......12 © Forsk 2010 5 .................................... 14 The Explorer Window .....................7 1......... 39 Copying a Map to Another Application ............................................................................10 1.................... 36 Editing a Point.......9 1.......8.................................4.................. 13 The Atoll Work Area ..............................................5 1......... 28 Displaying Rulers Around the Map ....2 1. 28 Measuring Distances on the Map ................................................2..............1 1.....8...4 1.............................................................................................................................................. 28 Displaying the Map Legend ...........................................4....................10......................................... 21 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ..1.......... 26 Zooming In on a Specific Area...........2.....................4......................3......................................................6 1.................................................... 17 Renaming an Object ...............................................................................................................9................................................................................................................. 39 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image ...................................... 19 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse .......................................4............................................................... and Points........1 1.4 1............................................1 1....4............................. 20 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse ................................2...............4....................................... 33 Using a Geographic Export Zone ..........................1 1........................................................................................................................2 1..................................3........ Lines..................8... 37 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results.....8.................................3 1............................ 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 1.......4....3 1...............................................3......4 1................3.................................................3.......................4..........3 1........2 1...................5 1.......................................................2............3............ 16 Working with Objects ..... 26 Changing the Map Scale ...........................4............. 19 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse ....................3.............................................................6 1............................ 30 Using a Focus Zone...............................4......................................3............................................ 36 Editing Contours........................................................................2.................................................. 15 Navigating in the Explorer Window ......................4...................................................................3 1.................................5 1...........4 1........................ 18 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links ................................................... 13 Working with Document Windows ....4....... and Points Using the Context Menu .. 27 Using the Panoramic Window ...............4..............................3.......3.... 34 Creating Polygons...........................................................................1 1.............4...2 1............ 27 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels....6 1....... 17 Using the Object Context Menu .......3...................................................3 1........ 21 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects . 17 Deleting an Object ......1................................ 16 Working with Layers Using the Explorer .....................11 1........................................................................................10...............4...........................................................................4.............. 37 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format ........................2 1.........................................................................................2 1...............4.........................1....................1 1...................4. 14 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window.................................. 16 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer.2...5 1...4.......................................................9..............................................................2..................................3................................Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents..........................................................1 1.. 27 Moving the Map in the Document Window................1...............1 1..................................1.......9..............................2 5 The Working Environment .............. 33 Editing Polygons............................................................4....................3 1............................1 1..........................................3 1....10......................................4........ 35 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines ........................................3.....4 1...............................3 1...................... 27 Centring the Map Window on an Object...............8............ Lines.......................4.......... 31 Using a Printing Zone .......................4.......................................................4.6 1........ 26 Zooming In and Out ................................................... 29 Using a Computation Zone ............................................................. 17 Displaying the Properties of an Object ...3 1.......................2....................2.....4......................3............................................ 31 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.............................................................

.......................................................................6..................3 6 .....5 1.......1 1.......................................................................68 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window ...........71 Tips and Tricks ................6...................55 Printing a Docking Window ....................................................................................42 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table..........................................2.........1 1..................1 1................3.........................................................8.............................................................................58 Advanced Grouping.................................................1..........5............................................................4 1.............5 1..................7.........................57 Grouping Microwave Links by Site .......8....................................................................................7 1............................1 1...7..............................5.......3 1..................... Sorting......1 1.............................................................................47 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells ...............................5 1........Atoll User Manual 1..............1 1.............. Deleting.................1 1.............5.............7.............................................................70 Importing a Folder Configuration......................7..........5.......................5.................................................63 Restoring All Records.....................2 1............................................60 Sorting Data in Tables.......7...........2 1....................7................44 Defining the Table Format................49 Importing Tables from Text Files....47 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents ..43 Editing the Contents of a Table................64 Advanced Filtering: Examples ...............54 Previewing Your Printing.........6....7......69 Folder Configurations...3 1..................2 1..............10 1....................................................................................................7.........................................................................................................5......................................67 Site Lists.............................7.............................................3 1..7...........................................4.......................6.3..5....................................56 Grouping Data Objects..........................2 1..71 Creating and Comparing Subfolders.47 Copying and Pasting a Table Element ................................3 1..........................6 1..............................................................................13 Map Window Pointers ..................7...41 Adding....1....5.........5.....7........6...........................................................................................................................................7..64 User Configurations ..........8.........................................................70 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration ....................5......................8......................................67 Importing a User Configuration ........................69 Creating a Folder Configuration ........52 Printing a Map .......1 1....................2................................3......................5.......................................66 Exporting a User Configuration ......7.2 1....................1.....................62 Advanced Data Filtering ................................................................................................................56 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ...............................................59 Sorting Data ...............................5....................................................................................................1........2..............2 1...1 1................................................................................................................2...................................40 1.......................6..............1 1.....71 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone.............................61 Filtering Data................................67 Creating a Site List .....1 1...................................................................73 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 1................................72 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name .42 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table ....................5.............................................1 1...................................................3.7.........................................................................................1 1.... and Filtering Data....................70 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration ...............7........7..4 1...................2 1.....................................................................................................................4.................7.....................72 Refreshing Maps and Folders ...................3 1.............................6...............................................................6.3 1....2...................................................68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone ......................................8 1........7..............43 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table .........................................................................................42 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields ..........................6 1..........................11 Working with Data Tables .............................................................................................6 1.....4 1....................................5.....9 1............2 1.....3 1..................................................6..........................................................1 1........................5.................................................................................. and Editing Data Table Fields............................................................................7 1.2 1..............................................................................................2 1...............................................................4 1.......................3...........6 1........................7.................................2.................................6.....................................................7.7............................................................................7................................................70 Exporting a Folder Configuration....................................3..........56 Configuring the Group By Submenu .............................8 1................7.......................6..............6...........................................5 1..........................................................................51 Importing Tables from XML Files .........................68 Editing a Site List.............................52 Printing Data Tables and Reports ..............................53 Defining the Printing Zone ............58 Examples of Grouping ......................................................6.....49 Exporting Tables to Text Files.....................................7.....................3 1.......................................................3 1........................6...........56 Grouping................................68 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window ......62 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection......7.....................7...............................72 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property ....2.....................................................................53 Defining the Print Layout ....5 1....4 1.8 1..............4 1......41 Opening a Data Table ............5............5.......2 1..............................2 1...............52 Printing in Atoll ....................................................50 Exporting Tables to XML Files ...4..............................60 Advanced Sorting .................................................8....5.....7......7..................7 1.3 1..7.........5..............................6 1...........44 Copying and Pasting in Tables .....................................................................4 1............................52 Printing Recommendations ...7............................5.2 1..................................................................................................................................................................7...........................5.......................................................................................7...............................................2...........................................................1..............3...................................................................................70 Deleting a Folder Configuration......................................................5 1......72 Undoing and Redoing ...........................................6.............................................................73 Searching for a Point on the Map ...............5................................................8...........................................................69 Filtering on a Site List...................................72 Searching for Objects on the Map.2 1.................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................7............2.....1 2..........................8......................................... 106 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer ..................3.......................................................................................................1 2...................................... 85 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database ...........................................5................ 90 Configuring Automatic Backup ................................2......................2................................... Lines... 107 Importing Several Scanned Images .................................................3............................3.....................................................7 Managing Geographic Data ..1 3......................3 3..............................................................................3.........1..................................10.................................................... 109 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics...............4 3...........3...................2 3.........8 3.....5....................................................................................................... 75 2 2................. 108 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties ...................................................................1 3................................................................5.......9.................................4 2................................ 79 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project ...................................1 3..........................................2... 81 Working in a Multi-User Environment ...10............................................................................................................. 95 Supported Geographic Data Formats .9.............................1 3........... 100 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File ........................................3.......3........ 106 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab.........................................11 3..........................3.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 97 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File .... 105 Clutter Heights ......................................1.................... 87 Making a Backup of Your Document ......................................................................................................................... 73 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer.............................................. 110 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas ............... 79 Creating an Atoll Document .......................... 104 Adding a Clutter Class.............................10..........................3...................................... 102 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File................2..2............ 103 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes . 106 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer............................... 103 3.............................................................................................................. 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations .....................2..... 112 3................ 107 Scanned Images ............................................................................................................................1 2...........2 2.............................................................7.................................................................................. 74 Using Icons from the Toolbar ...................6 3......................................................................2 3..........................................................8............................................. 111 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area .................................................... 95 Geographic Data Types ......1 3.........2......5 Starting an Atoll Project .......................1...........2.................................2.............2 3.............6 1...........2..............................2 3.............................................. 84 Working With a Document on a Database....1 2....................................................................3 3................................................................. 102 Digital Terrain Models ...................................................10.... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ......................................................................................................5 Clutter Classes......2 2.......................10 3..............................................................................................3....................................4 1....................................................... 105 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes .................................................................................3 3.......... 90 Recovering a Backup .................2 3..............................................10... 104 Defining Clutter Class Properties .. 111 Displaying Information About Geo Data . 79 Templates Available ............................... 98 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data.................2...Table of Contents 1..........................................................................4 3...........................8..7 3.....................................2.............................................. 99 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database ..2 3................3 2...........................................................................................2 3.................................1 3..8........................4 3 3............2.............................................................. 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data................2 3.........5 1.........2.. 91 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects ...............................2.......... 102 Embedding Geographic Data .......5 3...1 © Forsk 2010 Geographic Data Sets .................... 91 2. and Points ............. 86 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database ...... 83 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database ........................................ 107 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images .............................................................. 74 Using Shortcuts in Atoll ...............1 3..............2...........9 3.. 109 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data .....2....................................2 3...... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ......3 2................................................ 111 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area .......................................... 101 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders......................................................8..............................................................................3 2....................................5................................................................................................ 80 Defining a New Atoll Document .... 108 Geoclimatic Maps ..3 3........... 105 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ........................3.......................... 83 The Atoll Multi-User Environment ................ 96 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File .. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7 ..............................................3 Contours........................ 99 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type ....................................................................................2 2..................5.....................................................8.............................................. 96 Importing Geo Data Files ...........................................................1 3.... 106 3......7 Using the Status Bar to Get Information.3............................6 3.......3......1 3...................................5 3............12..............2 2..................2 2........7..............12 3...........................4 3................................................................. 112 Exporting a Geo Data Set ........................1 2........................

...................3 6...........................................115 Saving Geographic Data ..151 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects ........1 4.....................................................................138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table ....132 Interference Reduction Factor ....................114 Creating a Clutter Polygon .156 6............................................................................................................3 4..3 4......................1 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands .....................................2......................14..........................125 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns ..........13....116 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File.............1 3....3..139 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility...........................................4.......................................................................................................123 Defining Antennas...................................154 Defining Quality Objectives .......................................3..155 Defining Availability Objectives .........................................................................................2...2 5...........1 3...............................14.................2 4.4 4..............115 Editing Geoclimatic Maps...116 Saving Modifications to an External File ...............138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table ...........................................5..............................................................................1....................................3 3...........................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility ...............................1......145 Microwave Frequency Bands .................................................................................................1 4....2 3.......3.................3.............................................................................................................1 3.............2 5 5.................2 Importing a Geo Data Set ......123 Importing Microwave Antennas........................146 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands .....3 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands .....117 Updating the Source File......................................1 4...........................................................................................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility ............................................13.................................................12..........3..1................4 Antennas and Equipment....146 Short-Haul Frequency Band......................1 6.............................3.........................................................1 4............................................................................2...1.........1..............................................................................................153 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives ................2 Managing Calculations in Atoll .............123 Creating an Antenna ..3 4............3...................................................................154 Microwave Link Classes........2 Editing Geographic Data .............138 Defining Compatibility Manually .......................................................................2 4......127 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll..151 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ......................1 5.....3.........................................................................5.............................125 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns ..................1 6................................Atoll User Manual 3....................................140 4............................1 3..........................................1.................................13 3..........116 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ....................2...........................................1 5.....123 Defining the List of Manufacturers ........2 4....................................114 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ....................................2..............1 4........................................................2.136 Microwave Waveguides and Cables ............................1 6...114 Editing Clutter Polygons ..................................................................................................................................................2 3...........................................5 4........................................................................................2 4.................2...2 4..........3........5.......................................................................................1 6............................................................................................................1...........................................14 3......................................................2.....118 Creating a New File from a Larger File .............................3 3....................................................................1 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ..14.............4 3.....................2 4..............................................................2........................2........132 Digital Hierarchies ........................................147 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band .....................3 4..........126 Microwave Equipment..14.........2 3.................................................132 Advanced Configuration..................................................5..............................................................1......117 Combining Several Files into One File.....14...................2 6.........................................................................................................................................................137 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables......................................1.....3......4 3...1 4....................................................452 Model.......................145 Long-Haul Frequency Band ....................................14............138 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility ...5 4 4.................................................................146 5...........................113 3...........................................128 Importing Microwave Equipment.................2 5......................................................1...................................137 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable ......1 4................3..............................................................................145 Medium-Haul Frequency Band ...................................................13.......113 Editing Clutter Class Maps............................................13.....148 6 6............................................................1 4.....119 3......133 Theoretical Graphs........3 5.......................5..........................................14.1.............................................................13.........1.......151 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.................................................................118 Exporting an Embedded File.......154 Defining Performance Objectives................2.............................................................................................................................2 6........................115 Deleting Clutter Polygons..........................................................................................4..............................................2 6...................................................................................2................5...........................................1.13.....................................2 4.........................156 Global Parameters ........156 Defining Calculation Parameters .................

...2 7...6 7......3............................................ 210 Displaying Reflection.....6..................................................4............2.................................................................................................................... 176 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites........................................................1 7...................................... 193 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile .........................................................................................................................2....................................................1 7................................................. 206 Setting a Microwave Link as Active ........................5.................5.........5............................................................................................................ 200 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse .... 194 Printing a Microwave Link Profile..........................3........................................................................... 191 Deleting a Microwave Link Template.......................................4..... 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ...........3......................3 Microwave Link Project Management ...........................8 7..................1 7.........6... 185 Definition of a Microwave Link................4.......1 7........2 7........4.........2 7........................................................ 185 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link ....................................................................3 7.............2............................................4...... 208 Creating Multi-hops...............................1 7..... 206 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report........ 191 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links .......4.......2..................................5..4 7...................3.........2..3.........2.......................................1...................4.....................5 7.....2 7.............1 7...1............. 204 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget. 191 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map .........1..............4 7........................... 180 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site ......4......2 7..............................................................3...... 179 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites ..1........... 211 Analysing Reflections ......................3..........................................................3 7................3 7............ 173 Designing a Microwave Link Network ..........................................................5.....3 7......... 200 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater..........................................2 7........5 7................................................................................................Table of Contents 6...........1.............................................2......................3 7......1 7.............5..................... 176 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites . 203 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins.2......................................... 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7......... 174 Site Description................1............ 193 Displaying the Path Profile ............................... 175 Site Survey Tools ........................4............................2...........2 7....................................................... 175 Creating or Modifying a Site ......5................................7 7.....1 7...............3 Link Parameters ....................................................................4............2...................................................5.........2...............................4 7............................................. 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis .........3..................... 197 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights....3...... 192 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ...................4.................2...................... 194 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options............... 181 Search Tools for New Sites .....4.................4 7.............. 192 Checking Data Consistency .1....................... 200 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights..................................................................... 206 Analysing Microwave Links .................3 7............................................................2...................................................... 190 Managing Microwave Link Templates .................................................1.2..........3 7................. 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link .......................................................................................................... 163 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links ..............................1 7..... 205 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display......................... 173 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites ..............1 7........ 206 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report ..................................... 176 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site .............................................................3.....5........................................................................................................................1 7... 200 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights................... 201 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater .... 191 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template .......2................................1 7.1.....................5 7.......................................1 6...................................3................................................... 202 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse . 192 Analysing the Path Profile .........................................................4..................2 7...........1 7..................1 7................................................2... 174 Creating Sites ......................4 7....2 7.2.7 7. 188 Defining Port Parameters ..........................2 7...............................................................................1 7........................ 201 Description of a Passive Repeater .....1................2......................6 7.............................2 6....................2 7...................................................................................3....5 7.......4.................3 7...........2 © Forsk 2010 9 ....................................................... 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links .... 195 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values .........................5..4 7.......................................................... 203 Analysing a Single Microwave Link .............................3....................................................5...3.............5................................................. 184 Creating Microwave Links ..............3........................................2 6............................................................................................................... 204 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters ........................................1............................................... 195 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile.................2..........................3........ 194 Zooming In on the Profile....................... 165 7 7..................................1..... 207 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets...........................5.............5................ 193 Studying Microwave Link Clearance......2..........................................................4..................9 7...........2................................................2 7...2.................................. 189 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template...............................3................3..... 207 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity............3 7................................... 202 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability ..............................................5...............................3.2...................4...........................................2 7..........................2 7.....................................................................3.....................................................................5 7..............3.............................................1.........................3 7..........2... 190 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template........5.3 7...........6 7........5..... 210 Studying Reflection ........................1................................................2...

......................................................................9 7............................................8..............................8 7.....................1...........1 7...217 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse ........................................5 7. 233 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ..............................1................................8 7..............7..........................................1.....2 7..............................8.................................229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ...............4........................................................................1 7.............226 Advanced Configuration........214 Solutions Against Reflections..7.........7...........................221 Defining IRF Graphs Manually ...............................................................6.............2 7......................................................................2 7........................................9...........5 7.........................................................................................1 7................................................221 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant.....3 7.........................218 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser ..7..............1..........2...............................................................9.8...6.....................1 7..............225 Defining the Content of the Interference Report...219 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products..229 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally.9..........................3 7......7 7..........9...................1..........................216 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities .............229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse ..........................9.....................................................................................8...........................................................227 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties ................................217 Checking Site Parities on the Map ..4 7..230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub.....................................................7........................................................................................................................1..............1 7.....................2 7............4 7...............................8........1 7.........................220 Analysing Interference .............1 7.......214 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters .................4 7.....................227 Point-to-Multipoint Links..........4..............226 Managing Interference Calculation Validity........................8....................1.............5 7.................217 Creating a Report on Site Parities........6 7.............................................................227 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link ............221 Interference Reduction Factor..................9.......2 7....................................................224 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link .............3 7....................................................................1.......1 7........9..................9....8............................................9.....................7.....................215 Planning Microwave Link Channels ...........212 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report ....................3 7...........225 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links .......228 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active.......................................................................10 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report...........2...........2 7............................................................6........................................9.......................................................2 7..................230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse.................231 Index ...................222 Using IRF in Interference Calculations............9.......6 7......6..................1.................230 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link........................................8....2.1........8...Atoll User Manual 7...1..1.....................................9 7.............8..........................................................................230 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link....218 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search......7 7..............................1.................3 7...........7.....224 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links ....................................................................................................226 Displaying Interference on the Map ..........................................1.........................

Chapter 1 The Working Environment .

.

1 on page 14. Atoll also provides other tools. You can change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are displayed. allowing you to manage large amounts of data. You can also use the table feature to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table. The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. such as a search tool to locate either a site. and support for standard Windows shortcuts. with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window. or configuration. with the ability to have several document windows open at the same time. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 15. some of which can be docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1. parts of it. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • "The Atoll Work Area" on page 13 "The Explorer Window" on page 15 "Working with Objects" on page 17 "Printing in Atoll" on page 52 "Working with Maps" on page 26 "Working with Data Tables" on page 41 "Grouping. Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document arranged in folders. Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. for example. arranged in folders. support for drag-and-drop. or you can link your project to external files. context menus. You can sort and filter the data in a table. or only certain objects. Using the Explorer window. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. or change how the data is displayed. The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. Sorting. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 13 . Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document. you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites. You can. and clutter classes. as well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). You can also export the current display definition. define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects. or a vector. consists of the main window where the map window and data tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. shown in Figure 1.1 The Atoll Work Area The Atoll work area. a point on the map. and Filtering Data" on page 56 "Tips and Tricks" on page 72. calculations. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print functionality.1 on page 14). for cutting and pasting. etc. The tools open in separate windows. You can save the entire project as a single file. 1. for example.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1 The Working Environment The Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to create and define your microwave-planning project in a single application.. to use it in other documents. The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables.

but part of the working environment and. To maximise a window in its docking area: • Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. in order to display all of them at the same time. Depending on the position of the docking window.1. you can tile document windows. You can resize.1. Other windows and tools. select the name of the window. you can have several document windows open at the same time. They are not part of the individual Atoll document. To close a window: • Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. they will display the content of the active document. Depending on the position of the window. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. You can leave a window in its docking area.1: Atoll user interface 1.Atoll User Manual Toolbar Document window (map) Workspace Explorer window (docked) Panoramic window (floating) Point Analysis window (docked) Figure 1. maximise. You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimising the window. in order to display the title bar of each document window. To cascade document windows: • Select Window > Cascade. or cascade them. allowing you to maximise the amount of area for document windows or other windows. and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application. such as the Explorer window. display the content of the active document. Depending on the position of the window. As well. To tile document windows: • Select Window > Tile. To display a window: • On the View menu.1 Working with Document Windows When you have one Atoll document open.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window Only document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. 1. when you switch to a different document. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. To minimise a window in its docking area: • Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or you can have it float over the working environment. You can also choose to remove them from their position and float them over the Atoll working environment. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.

The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working environment. GSM/GPRS Parameters. WiMAX 802.) you import or create: Clutter classes Clutter heights Digital Terrain Model Population data Any other geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA. Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it. the following are described: • • • • "Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 15 "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 16 "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16 "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. etc.16d Parameters. they remain the same no matter which document you open. arranged in folders. As well. 1.16e simulations.2. CDMA2000) • The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To float a window: • Double-click the docking window title bar. WiMAX 802. It contains: A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models: Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 15 . allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information. Depending on the modules installed with Atoll. or LTE Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and Drive test data The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking. CDMA2000 Parameters. or LTE Parameters UMTS Simulations. WiMAX 802.2 The Explorer Window The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. the Data tab has the following folders: • Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions UMTS Parameters. To prevent the window from docking as you move it. CDMA2000 Simulations . You can modify items at the folder level. To dock a window: • To return the window to its previous docked location. UMTS HSPA. press CTRL as you drag the docking window. most folder contents can also be accessed in a table. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. or you can access and edit items individually. WiMAX 802. Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document. In this section.16d Simulations. scanned images. For information on working with tables. 1. double-click the docking window title bar.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs The Explorer window has three tabs: • The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. Or • Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area. The number of folders depends on the number and types of geographical data types (vector data. with changes affecting all items in the folder.16e Parameters.

2. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1. it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects. the map is made of objects arranged in layers. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window The Explorer window has three tabs. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map. ) and the 1. Click and drag the object to its new position. Any additional module created using the API. Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the folder name. When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ). For example. a horizontal black line indicates where the object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.2). Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand ( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name. This allows you to hide one type of object so that another type of object is more plainly visible.2. so that the results of one prediction are more clearly displayed. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16) and on the transparency of these layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). To move from one tab to another: • Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window.2. it will still be taken into consideration during calculations. To hide an object on the map: 1. each tab has objects and folders containing objects. 1. 2. To expand a folder to display its contents: • Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name. To move a layer up or down: 1. The check box appears cleared ( object is no longer visible on the map. you could hide all predictions but one.2. As you drag the object. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.Atoll User Manual ITU 1546 WLL Microwave Propagation Model Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) The AFP models available in your Atoll installation. A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer In Atoll.

Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object and selecting the operation from the context menu.1 Renaming an Object You can change the name of an object in Atoll. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. Most objects in Atoll belong to an object type. see "Printing Recommendations" on page 53. a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter. 3. For more information. The context menu appears. To rename an object: 1. Select Delete from the context menu. 1. the following are explained: • • • "Using the Object Context Menu" on page 17 "Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map" on page 18 "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The selected object is deleted. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name. see the Administrator Manual. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 17 . Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. In this section. Select Rename from the context menu. an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that are common to most objects. Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 17. For more information. In this section.1.ini file. 2. Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18.1 Using the Object Context Menu In Atoll.3. objects such as sites are named with default prefixes. the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained: • • • Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 17.2: Moving a layer Note: Before you print a map.3 Working with Objects In Atoll. 1. you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. To delete an object: 1.3. the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects.1. Note: In Atoll. 2. 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. The context menu appears.3. For example. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix.2 Deleting an Object You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map. 1. You can change the default prefix for sites by editing the atoll.

2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map In a complex microwave or -planning project. Select Properties from the context menu. The context menu appears. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue.) in the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( • • • • : jump to the first item in the list : jump to the previous item in the list : jump to the next item in the list : jump to the last item in the list ) in the lower-left corner of each Properties dialogue: If you have made any changes to the properties of an item. Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switching to the next Properties dialogue. clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19). Switching Between Property Dialogues You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (antennas. When a transmitter is selected. both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab. you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters). or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it.3. Tip: When you are selecting data objects on the map. You can use this feature. For repeater properties. When a site is selected. it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. although it might be visible in the map window.Atoll User Manual 1. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .1. the following are explained: • • • • • "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19"Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20. The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section. to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the Properties dialogue. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag. you can switch only within this group. For propagation model properties. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. In this section. for example. When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table. You can also change the position of a site by dragging it. If transmitters are grouped by a flag. you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag. The browse buttons are not available: • • • • When creating a new item. For example: • • • If transmitters are grouped by site. The Properties dialogue appears. 1. When there is more than one microwave link with with the same azimuth. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and microwave links directly from the map. 2. the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). To open the Properties dialogue of a data object: 1.3. etc. sites.

To select one of several microwave link with the same azimuth: 1. Select Move to a Higher Location. In the map window. By default. 2.3. 2. 1. the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. Select thelink from the context menu. To have Atoll move a site to a higher location: 1. When the position of a site is locked. Click and drag the site to the desired position. Atoll can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site. 3. To move a site using the mouse: 1. An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer. A context menu appears with a list of thelinks with the same azimuth (seeFigure 1. Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly. click thelinks. 2.2. It is defined in degrees. with 0° indicating north. Release the site where you would like to place it. As you drag the site. Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site. 4.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll. Click Yes to confirm. Right-click the site in the map window. The context menu appears. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). 3. click the link extremity whose azimuth you want to modify. you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius. Figure 1. - When you select a microwave link. both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 19 . On the map. Atoll locks the position of a site.3.3: Selecting one microwave link 2. in terms of reception and transmission.2. In the Data tab of the Explorer window.3. Atoll enables you to select a specificmicrowave link.2. 3. using the mouse.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. or by using the mouse. you can set the azimuth of a link’s antenna by modifying it on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue.2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. 1.3). 1. or you can modify it on the map.3. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar. To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse: 1.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links If there is more than one microwave link with the same azimuth. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue. enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and click OK.

you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. 5. 1. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the antenna’s position relative to the site. The antenna’s azimuth relative to the link direction is modified on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue.Atoll User Manual 5. by pressing CTRL+Z. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. click the link extremity you want to move. antennas are placed on the site. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). A cross appears under the pointer.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse By default. you can change the link extremity and place it on another site using the mouse. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected link extremity to the desired position. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. you can change the position of the antenna relative to the site either by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters or by entering the coordinates of the antenna position on the General Tab of the Microwave link Property dialogue. in the toolbar) 1. To move a microwave link extremity using the mouse: 1. 4. but a short distance away. Release the mouse when the frame appears around the site. click the link extremity you want to move. Click the green rectangle and drag it to the other site on the map. 3. To select another site for the link extremity on the map: 1.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse In Atoll.3. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle.3.2. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth. 4. 2. However. On the map. On the map. The current coordinates (x and y) of the antenna are displayed in the far right of the status bar. by pressing CTRL+Z. antennas are occasionally not located directly on the site. by pressing CTRL+Z. A cross appears under the pointer. 3. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. using the mouse. The position of the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. 2. or by clicking to undo the changes made. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the antenna from the site position. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. 5. indicating it is selected.2. In Atoll. The site for the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue and the link is renamed. You can also modify the position of the antenna on the map. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo.

belong to an object type. most objects. Figure 1. 3.4). followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on your Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 25). 1.3.3. the Display tab will only show the options applicable to an individual object (see Figure 1.5).3. the display options are explained. 2. The context menu appears. Depending on the object type.3 Display Properties of Objects In Atoll. The Display tab is similar for all object types whose appearance can be configured. The Properties dialogue appears. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window.4: The Display tab for Sites When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 21 . Select the Display tab. the following options are available: "Defining the Display Type" on page 22 "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23 "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24 "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24 4.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects Figure 1. Select Properties from the context menu. How an individual object appears on the map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. In this section. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1. Set the display parameters. such as sites.5: The Display tab for an individual site To define the display properties of an object type: 1.

2. objects of different types. iii. For information on the commands available. Modify the symbol as desired. see Figure 1. Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after the threshold selected in the table. Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. The value intervals will be determined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour. iv. a new site. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. i. Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style. sites. i. iv. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. ii. 2. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To modify the appearance of the symbol. vi. ii. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. Click the Actions button. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. This display type can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. you could use this display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type. and enter a value in the Interval box. Enter the upper and lower limits of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. To modify the appearance of a symbol. Select the display type from the Display Type list: Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. Notes: • • When you create a new map object. are immediately identifiable. click the symbol in the table below. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands: Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. for example. Using the Actions Button The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. click the symbol in the table. for example. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type. Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. see the Administrator Manual. i. you can choose from the following display types: unique. for example. you must click the Refresh button ( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type. iii. By defining a unique symbol for an object type. To change the display type: 1. Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals.Atoll User Manual 5. To access the Actions menu: 1. to distinguish population density. iii. or the altitude of sites.7 on page 24. Define the ranges directly in the table below. you select Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. For example. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. For an example. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. This display type can be used. or automatic. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table before the threshold selected in the table. Modify the symbol as desired. Modify the symbol as desired. v. discrete values. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. ii. Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals. Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table. Defining the Display Type Depending on the object selected. Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. or to distinguish inactive from active sites. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.ini file. v. Click OK. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. value intervals. To modify the appearance of a symbol. signal strength. You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in the atoll. For information on the commands available. click the symbol in the table below. For more information.

Defining the Object Type Label For most object types. 2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type. and some object types. Defining the Visibility Scale You can define a visibility range for object types. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. for example. 2. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Label box.6). select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box. To define an object visibility range: 1. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. such as sites. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 3. prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a certain scale. They do not affect which objects are considered during calculations. from top to bottom.6: Defining a label 3. Figure 1. Select Export if you want to export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file. and for printing and previewing printing. Select the fields which you want to display in the label: a. as displayed on the Map toolbar. c. you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an End Colour. you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. To define a label for an object type: 1. 4. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. This can be used to. such as predictions. Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display. Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. so that you can share them with other users or use them in other documents. Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types You can change the transparency of some objects. 2. including from fields that you add. To change the order of the fields. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box. An object is visible only if the scale. b. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. is within this range. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make it less transparent. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 23 . select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. such as clutter classes. To change the transparency: 1. Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration.

This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible. 2. and their subfolders. you can display information about each object in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. 1. For most object types. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Tip Text box. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click Note: to remove it. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24.Atoll User Manual Note: For most object types. and Point to Multipoint folders. the tool tip displays the total numbers of elements present in the Sites. The defined display will appear on the legend. To display the Legend window: • Select View > Legend. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object. you must activate the tool tip function before they appear. Links. To select a field to be displayed in the tool tip for the object type. 2. The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. on the Display tab of a signal level prediction. Figure 1.6). including from fields that you add. To define tip text for an object type: 1. In Figure 1. the intervals defined are: • • • Signal level >= -65 red -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals) Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage. In the Explorer window. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. Multi-Hops. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip: a. b. you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. The Legend window appears. If there is no information entered in this column. you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. For information on displaying or hiding objects. 3. Defining the Object Type Tip Text For most object types. Adding an Object Type to the Legend You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) in your Atoll document’s legend. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. To activate the tool tip function: • Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar.7: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend With value intervals. For more information on tool tips. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. such as sites and microwave links.7. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For more information on tool tips. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. Once you have defined the tool tips. Check the Add to legend box. you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend.

ini file. or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results. 4.ini file. the interval between each break. the study results are also immediately visible. Select the Display tab. In Figure 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 25 . The context menu appears.Signal Level Study" on page 25. Click OK. 2. This way. you can change the shading to display only those values.Server Coverage Studies" on page 25 "Shading ." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. If the selected display type for transmitters is "Automatic. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the results easier to read or more relevant to your needs. The Properties dialogue appears.10 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm.Chapter 1: The Working Environment You can also display the comments defined in the properties of a coverage prediction in the Legend window by setting an option in the atoll." Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of the transmitter that is best received on that pixel. the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values. Shading .9: Automatic display type To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type: 1.Signal Level Study Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals.Server Coverage Studies When doing a best server prediction.8. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study.3. Select Properties from the context menu. these value intervals appear as differences of shading.11." with the site name as the chosen value. for each pixel on the map. if you are more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm. 3.8: Value interval display type Figure 1. Figure 1. However. Atoll calculates. Automatic Display Type . 1. For example. see the Administrator Manual. The result is visible in Figure 1. For more information about setting options in the atoll. In Figure 1. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. you can change the range of data displayed. the transmitter display type is "Automatic. In this example.9. which server is best received.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects In this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used: • • "Automatic Display Type . you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received on each pixel. Figure 1. 6. 5. On the map. The difference in colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel.

or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward. The context menu appears. 3. and Points" on page 34 "Saving a Map as a Graphic Image" on page 39 "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 40. Click the map where you want to zoom in.1 Changing the Map Scale You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .4. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. Select the Display tab. Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL++. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).1. When you zoom in or out on the map. To zoom in on the map: 1.4 Working with Maps Atoll has the following functions to help you work with maps: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Changing the Map Scale" on page 26 "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 27 "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 27 "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 28 "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 28 "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 28 "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29 "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 "Editing Polygons. Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23)." 6. by zooming in on a specific area of the map.11: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm 1. 7. 4. Lines. "Map Window Pointers" on page 40. 1. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.1 Zooming In and Out Atoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. 2. you do so based on the position of the cursor on the map. Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105.4.10: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed: Figure 1. The Shading dialogue appears. by selecting Zoom In from the View menu. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study. or by choosing a scale. 2. 1. 5. Change the value of the First Break to "-80". 1.

allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i.e. Drag the border to its new position. 2. 1. A dark rectangle indicates what part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window.3 Choosing a Scale To choose a scale: 1. Select the scale from the list. Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+–. Enter the desired scale. To move between zoom levels: • • Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used (or press ALT + ←). Once you have returned to a previous zoom level. or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward. by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu. ) on the Map toolbar. the dark rectangle). 3. 1. Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL + D). 2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To zoom out on the map: 1. click the Next Zoom button ( level (or press ALT + →). Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. To resize the displayed map area: 1. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale. 2. Drag to the opposite corner. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction.4.1. If the scale value you want is not in the list: 1. Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+W). ) on the Map toolbar. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. You can use the Panoramic window to: • • • Zoom in on a specific area of the map Resize the displayed map area Move around the map. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on. 2. Click in the scale box ( 2. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. helping you situate the displayed area in relation to the entire map.. Drag to the opposite corner. Press ENTER. 2.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels Atoll saves the last five zoom levels.4. When you release the mouse button. 1.4. To move the map in the document window: 1. To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. Click the arrow next to the scale box ( 2.1. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).2 Moving the Map in the Document Window You can move the map in the document window using the mouse.4.3 Using the Panoramic Window The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. ) to return to the latest zoom 1. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out. When you release the mouse button. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 27 .2 Zooming In on a Specific Area To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. 1.1. 3.4.

In the Options dialogue. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object You can centre the map on any selected object. click the Coordinates tab.. for example. where you will have to change direction on the line. you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command. a transmitter. To measure a distance on the map between two points: 1. You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. Select Tools > Options. 2. or on any zone in the Zones folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 3. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept. To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points: 1. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure distance along a line with several points. Click the first point on the map once. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. a site. on the map. such as a site. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. Tip: If you want to quickly find an object. Click the first point on the map once. 2. 2.12: Measurement data in the status bar 1.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map You can display rulers around the map in the document window. When you reach the last point on the line. As you move the pointer away from the first point.e. 1. 2. the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.4. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu.12): The total distance between the first point and the last point The distance between the second-last point and the last point The azimuth between the last two points. 1. To the map window on a selected object: 1. 3. To display rulers: 1. the azimuth of each segment between two points. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point.12): The distance between the two points The azimuth between the two points.4. Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure). 2. As you move the pointer away from the first point. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. Total distance between Azimuth between secondfirst and last point last and last point Distance between secondlast and last point Figure 1. 4.Atoll User Manual To move around the map: 1. Drag the rectangle to its new position. The Distance Measurement tool also gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points.5 Measuring Distances on the Map You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. the dark rectangle). and the total distance.4. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.

• • • • 1. or points. select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24. link budget. lines. Zones can be used to define areas of the map for the following purposes: • Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. For example. Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. 1.8 Using Zones in the Map Window On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click OK. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 29 . 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. Under Display rulers. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone.4. b. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it.1 Creating a Filtering Zone To create a filtering zone: 1.7 Displaying the Map Legend You can display a map legend. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer.4. Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. if you have drawn a zone.4.e.). 5. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. For information on adding object types to the legend..8. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. if you have drawn a zone. To display the legend: • Select View > Legend. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29 "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30 "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31 "Using a Printing Zone" on page 33 "Using a Geographic Export Zone" on page 33. Draw the filtering zone: a. In this section. Focus Zone: With the focus zone.4. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box. 4. interference analysis. 1. etc.1.. The zones are a type of polygons. Select Draw from the context menu. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder. 2. Geographic Export Zone: The geographic export zone is used to define part of the map to be exported as a bitmap. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. In other words. In other words. c. the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions.8. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone. 4. you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results. which can be created and modified in the same way as contours. Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which microwave links are to be taken into consideration in calculations (i.1 Using a Filtering Zone The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. 1. etc. By limiting the number of sites. etc.

Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. • Once you have created a filtering zone. see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. 1. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible.8.2. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out. a polygon describing an administrative area. b. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. In other words. The context menu appears. c. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. Draw the computation zone: a.Atoll User Manual The filtering zone is delimited by a blue line. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. for example. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Filtering Zone from the context menu. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Computation Zone from the context menu. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. • Once you have created a computation zone. When you make a link budget or you study interference. You can also create a filtering zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the filtering zone.8. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. Select Draw from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. When working with a large network. to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered. that are selected by the current filter parameters). Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. 1. you can import it and use it as a computation zone. Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction.1 Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. If there is no computation zone defined. 5.2 Using a Computation Zone The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. and intersects the computation zone. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. a polygon describing an administrative area. filtered (i. 4. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document.e.4. Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. 3..4. you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the computation zone. For more information on the polygon editing tools. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. for example. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( ). For more information on the polygon editing tools. if you have drawn a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. 2.

see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. 3. you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made.4. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. in the following ways: Saving the focus zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration. You can also create a focus zone in one of the following ways: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the focus zone.3. Select Draw from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 31 . Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by rightclicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results. you can delete it from the map. However.8. 2. instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. When you no longer need the zone. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. etc. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. 4. 5. in the following ways: Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration. c. b. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links calculated in link budget. you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites. for example.8. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Focus Zone from the context menu. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.1 Drawing a Focus Zone To define a focus zone: 1.8. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Atoll will use the computation zone. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone. interference studies. if no focus zone is defined. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. • 1. Atoll takes the focus zone taken into account whether or not they are visible. - 1. The polygons of a focus zone must not intersect or overlap each other.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can save the computation zone. Note: A focus zone can consist of more than one polygon. Exporting the focus zone: You can export the focus zone by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. you can import it and use it as a focus zone. a polygon describing an administrative area. by combining several polygons. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports. Note: You can save the focus zone . 1. and filtering zones. In other words. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. if you have drawn a focus zone.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone. or by deleting parts of the polygons that make up these zones.3 Using a Focus Zone Using the focus zone . by using a focus zone for the report.It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. Right-click the Focus Zone folder.4. A focus zone is delimited by a green line. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. The context menu appears.4. Draw the focus: a. focus zone.

computation. The pointer changes ( ). The point is deleted. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. : To delete part of the selected polygon zone: 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar In Atoll. Double-click to close the polygon zone. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections: • • • "Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 33. 4. A point is added to the polygon zone border at the position of the pointer. 2. The filtering. Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone To edit a point of a polygon zone: 1. The pointer changes ( ). v. ii. Atoll merges them. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. ii. Adding a point to the polygon zone: i.Atoll User Manual The computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. Select Edit from the context menu. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. In this section. iii. ii.8. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone. Deleting a point from a polygon zone: i. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. you must first put it in editing mode. and focus zone polygons can contain holes.4. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. Draw more polygon zones if desired. Click the contour to edit. 1. You can now edit it by: Moving a point: i. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit. 3. click the Combine button ( ). : To combine several polygon zones: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Before you can edit a polygon zone. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. 2. iv. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. Drag the point to its new position.4. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. the following are explained: • • "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32 "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 33.1 Editing Polygon Zones You can edit polygon zones in several ways. ii. To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. If polygon zones overlap. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. Select the polygon zone. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. To put the polygon zone in editing mode: 1. The pointer changes ( ). The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32.

Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.4. click the Split button ( ). see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53. To remove a polygon zone: 1.4. 2. line. : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Click to place the contour. iii. 3. Move the contour. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu When you are editing polygon zones. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following: Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone.4. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. 1. iv. : To split the selected polygon into several polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. i. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. click the Intersection button ( ).8. After you have defined a geographic export zone. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour.8. The Properties dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone.4. select Delete Zone. Click the polygon zone you want to edit. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. i. iii. you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects. ii. ii. you can define a geographic export zone. From the context menu. ii. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. Double-click to close the area.8. Double-click to close the polygon. For information on using the printing zone. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 33 . line. or point from the map. In the Vector Edition toolbar. or point. or point. line. Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the map as a raster image. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now displayed. Using a Geographic Export Zone If you want to export part of the map as a bitmap. ii. line. click the Delete button ( ). 2. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected polygon and creates a new polygon.2 Removing a Polygon Zone When you no longer need a polygon zone. To edit a polygon zone using the context menu: 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. iii. iv.6 Using a Printing Zone The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. iii. Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu. you can access certain commands using the context menu.Chapter 1: The Working Environment i.5 1. Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap. 4. iv. 1. Move: i. or point on the map. Double-click to close the polygon. Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour.

9 Editing Polygons. lines.9. lines. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counterclockwise order. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Lines.1 Adding a Vector Layer You can add vector objects such as polygons. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order.Atoll User Manual To define a geographic export zone: 1. or point. For more information on the polygon editing tools. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 5. When you release the mouse. be used to add additional information to geographic data. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. Important: The geographic export zone can only export in raster format. by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. You can move or delete the points that define polygons. lines and points. and points. and Points" on page 35 "Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines" on page 35 "Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar" on page 36 "Editing a Point" on page 36 "Editing Contours. Select Draw from the context menu. and Points Atoll uses different types of polygons. and points. When you no longer need the polygon. 3. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. geoclimatic maps.4. lines. 1. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. for example. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. Lines. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. b. You can import it by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. For information on modifying certain geographic data maps by adding a vector layer. including the computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. by combining several polygons. called contours. For example. by signal level. • Once you have created a geographic export zone. You can edit polygons by editing the points that define them. the zones such as the computation and focus. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. the different ways of editing polygons. Another type of polygon. or by deleting parts of the polygons. Fit to Map Window: You can create a geographic export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a geographic export zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Geographic Export Zone from the context menu. You can also create a geographic export zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the geogaphic export zone. by path loss. and points are explained: • • • • • • "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34 "Creating Polygons. In this section. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. The context menu appears. line. 4. Lines.4. and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 37. or by total losses). lines. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. you can delete it from the map. 2. can along with lines and points. are specific types of polygons. Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the polygons. You can also modify certain geographic data maps. Polygons. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. 1. described in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line . lines or points to geographical map information in a project by first creating a vector layer. Draw the geographic export zone: a. by adding a vector layer to them and afterwards adding polygons. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. and points in the map window. by a transmitter attribute. Note: You can export the geographic export zone as a polygon. you can import it and use it as a geographic export zone. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone.

For information on adding vector objects such as contours. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar. Select Edit from the context menu. select View > Vector Edition Toolbar. For information on renaming objects. The tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are available. © Forsk 2010 Position the pointer over the point you want to move. as explained in "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34. c. The context menu appears.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add a vector layer to the Geo tab: • Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. The context menu appears. For more information. Tip: You can also make the vector tools available by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. lines. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. and Points" on page 35. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. you can add polygons.9.. New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point. The pointer changes ( Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited ). New Line: a. Right-click the vector layer on the Geo tab. Double-click to close the contour.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines You can edit the shape of polygons and lines on the vector layer. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. 1.2 Creating Polygons. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. b. Atoll creates a folder called "Vectors" on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. you can ensure that you select the correct folder.4. lines. b. 2. c. 1. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line. By renaming each vectors folder.9. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible. Lines. 4. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. b. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. You can now edit by: Moving a point: i. see "Creating Polygons. line. 3. Click each time you change angles on the line. or point to a vector layer: 1. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. Select the contour or line. right-click the vector layer folder. 3. c. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. and points to the vector layer.4. Lines. To edit the shape of polygons and lines: 1. 2. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar: New Polygon: a. and points to it. New Rectangle: a. and Points Once you have created a vector layer. 35 . Select Edit from the context menu. Note: If the polygon or rectangle is on the vector layer of a geoclimatic map. Double-click to end the line. you must define the value the polygon or rectangle represents and map the vector layer. To add a polygon.

Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. Atoll merges them. Double-click to close the contour. : To split the selected contour into several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1.9. Deleting a point from a contour or a line: i. iv. Drag the point to its new position. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. right-click the vector layer folder. ii. ii. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. click the Combine button ( ). Double-click to close the area. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. v. The pointer changes ( ). Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar In Atoll. right-click the vector layer folder. i. i. The context menu appears. click the Intersection button ( ). click the Split button ( ). The context menu appears. ii. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. ii.4.9. iv. ii.4. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. : To delete part of the selected contour: In the Vector Edition toolbar. you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. iv. 1. If contours overlap. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. The pointer changes ( ). The point is deleted. iii. 3. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.Atoll User Manual ii. i. iii. Double-click to close the contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. click the Delete button ( ). : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Select Edit from the context menu. ii. 2. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. Draw more contours if desired. Select Edit from the context menu. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour. Double-click to close the contour. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. iv. : To combine several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. iii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one. Click the contour to edit. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. A point is added to the contour border or line at the position of the pointer. Adding a point to a contour or a line: i. 2. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. 1.5 Editing a Point To edit a point: 1. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iii.

Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. and any Properties of the contour. In this case. Note: 1. TIF. Click the vector object you want to edit. or point on the map. or point from the map. line. Click the point you want to delete. Lines. You can export coverage predictions separately or you can export several coverage predictions at the same time. You can now edit by: Moving: i. In vector formats. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application. The pointer changes ( ). and Points Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 37 . Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. lines. Select the point. the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage.4. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. the following are explained: • • • "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 38 "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 38 "Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions" on page 39. Move the contour. 2. ii. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer. Click the point you want to move. you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line. ii. Deleting a point: i. by path loss. 3. or point. or point. or point. you can export in ArcView©. line. Click to place the contour.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results In Atoll. Only the commands relevant to the selected contour. MapInfo©. Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line. you can export the entire coverage prediction. line. line. or point. When you export more than one coverage prediction. iii. by signal level. JPEG 2000. Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour. you can not export a coverage prediction in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. or by total losses). The point is deleted. 1. you can access certain commands using the context menu. the Surface of the object. ii. or point are displayed in the context menu. by a transmitter attribute.4. or AGD formats. or point. In raster formats. and points. Move: i. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. line. you can export in BMP. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. line. line. Atoll suggests the formats that can be used for all the coverage predictions to be exported. All coverage types can be exported.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. or you can export a defined area of the coverage prediction.6 Editing Contours. In this section. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour.9. line. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour. or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. Drag the point to its new position. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. The pointer changes ( ). ArcView© grid. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. however. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1.

2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format To export a coverage prediction in raster format 1. To export part of the coverage prediction: a. the geographic export zone. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. change the Resolution of the exported coverage. To export the entire coverage prediction: Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. The Save As dialogue appears. enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. select the area to export: The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the study. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. under Coordinate Systems. b. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction. define the geographic export zone: a. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. Draw the geographic export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. 5. 2.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format To export a coverage prediction in vector format: 1. If desired. When you release the mouse. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. For information on displaying objects in the map window. change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported.4. b. 1. To export the geographic export zone. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line. If desired. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. 7. The context menu appears. 6. For information on displaying objects in the map window. c. 3. If desired. If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format: a. b. f. a. You can export the entire coverage prediction. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window.10.Atoll User Manual 1. 3. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 4. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. In the Save As dialogue. In the Save As dialogue. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. c. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. Under Region. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue). Select Draw from the context menu. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export.4. or enter the percentage in the text box. move the Smoothing slider. d. 2.10. or part of the coverage prediction. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. e. or 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Raster Export dialogue appears. enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list. 4. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported.

you can export them at the same time. 5. Drag to the opposite corner. 1.10. by a transmitter attribute. 7. you can define the following parameters: Folder: Enter the folder you want to store the exported coverage predictions in or click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to it. 3. enter a File name. If desired. 5. Click Save. When saving in BIL format.4. select a destination folder. 4. Geographic Export Zone Printing Zone ) in the Map toolbar. 8. Note: When you export several coverage predictions at the same time. The following file formats are supported: TIF. 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment The Geographic Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the geographic export zone. Click Export to export the selected coverage predictions. Format: Select the vector file format you want Atoll to export the coverage predictions in. In the Map Export dialogue. The Coverage Export dialogue appears. b. 6. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 39 . Time stamp: If you select the Time stamp check box. • You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. You can select: Selection: The area on the map selected in step 1. and select a file type from the Save as type list. the file is converted using the selected coordinate system. you should select the TIF. To export several coverage predictions at the same time: 1. The geographic export zone is only taken into consideration for raster file formats.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions If you have several coverage predictions that you want to export. Right-click the the Predictions folder. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. BIL. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results. Define the area to save: a. Atoll will add the date and time to the file name of each exported coverage prediction. Atoll allows you to save files larger than 2 Gb. Select Export Coverages from the context menu. 6. The context menu appears. Select File > Save Image As. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. by signal level. Atoll does not take the geographic export zone into consideration. by path loss. The Map Export dialogue appears. select the check boxes corresponding to the coverage predictions you want to export. BMP. The selected coverage predictions are saved in the selected folder. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. Under Options.4. To save a map as a graphic image: 1. Atoll selects the check boxes of all coverage predictions whose visibility check box is selected on the Data tab of the Explorer window. c. or TXT format. 4. or by total losses). In the Save as dialogue. select the zone that you wish to save as an image. 3. and ArcView Grid (TXT). BIL. By default. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. b. or enter the percentage in the text box.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image You can save a map as a graphic image. The Save As dialogue appears. 2. In the Coverage Export dialogue. If you wish to use the saved file as a digital terrain model. Resolution in metres: You can define a resolution for the exported coverage predictions. move the Smoothing slider. Click the Select an area button ( 2. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. Click Export. Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll.

Click OK. To draw a polygon. or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection. Rectangle drawing pointer Hand Zoom tool The rectangle drawing pointer indicates you can draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/geographic export zones. in the Panoramic window. Click OK. 6. select Pixel Size. Drag to the opposite corner. click and drag diagonally. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image. and enter a pixel size in the text box. The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone. Each pointer is described below: Appearance Description Selection arrow Meaning The zone selection pointer indicates that.4. 5. 9. select Edit > Paste Special. on the map. The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map. the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. or draw vector or raster rectangles on the map. you can define a zone to print or copy and. 4. The area of the map. 8. 3. click pointer once to start. and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model. and by double-clicking to close the polygon. 1. once to create each corner. select Scale. ) in the Map toolbar.4. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways: Select Use Screen Resolution Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres. Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size. Click OK. To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application: 1. Close the polygon by clicking twice. Select Edit > Copy Image. To define a zone. you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. Note: You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers. 9. you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. In the Paste Special dialogue.Atoll User Manual Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale. is pasted as an image into the new document. Define the area to copy: a. by clicking once to start the polygon. Click the Select an area button ( 2. 1. If you wish to export the image with rulers.12 Copying a Map to Another Application You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application. including the rulers. select Picture (Enhanced Metafile). The Copy Image dialogue appears. click and drag diagonally. draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/ eographic export Polygon drawing zones. Open the application into which you want to paste the image. b. Zoom area Pencil 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out at the location of the mouse pointer The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking and dragging to define the area. 7. The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or links. select Include Rulers. In the new application. enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. To define a zone. or draw vector or raster polygons on the map.13 Map Window Pointers In Atoll.

delete the polygon. 2. you can create a default value for a field you create. Select/create points Microwave link start End Multi-hop or point-tomultipoint microwave link Rotate hub antenna of point-tomultipoint link Measurements on the map Terrain section 1.1 Opening a Data Table To open a data table: 1. The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. microwave links. sort. the microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link. each subsequent click creates another point in the link. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a point. The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. You can also export the data or import data into the Atoll data tables. connected to the hub by a link.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Appearance Description Deletion Position indicator Meaning The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal clutter zone by clicking its border. The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna. delete the polygon. In this section. Deleting. As you move the pointer. and group the data contained in these tables. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can choose when filling in the field. 1. containing all their parameters and characteristics. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 41 .5 Working with Data Tables Atoll stores object data (sites. 3. The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon. or centre the map on the polygon. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42 "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 43 "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 44 "Defining the Table Format" on page 44 "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47 "Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents" on page 49 "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49 "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50 "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51 "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. the distance between the first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar. In the case of a multihop link. You can right-click to open a context menu to delete a point. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by clicking on one of the edges and dragging. Select Open Table from the context menu. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • "Opening a Data Table" on page 41 "Adding. or centre the map on the polygon. In the case of a point-to-multipoint. each subsequent link creates anew point. When you create a new column. antennas. You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns.) in the form of tables. The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables. etc. Once you have created the first point. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab. The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link.5. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. You can filter. The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the second point. and view a statistical analysis of the data.

you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. true/false.2. enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this object type. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Deleting. The Type of the field. 3.13: The Table tab 1. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. The maximum Size of the field. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set of columns. Figure 1.2. single. Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. When you open an Atoll document from a database. The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.Atoll User Manual 1. When opening an Atoll document from a database. 3. instead of loading all custom fields. The Group to which the field belongs.13): The Name of the field in the database (Name). To add a custom field to an object type’s data table: 1. You can create a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box. 2. - 42 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. Default Value: If you want. separating each list item with a hard return. you can select a group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. Enter a size in characters. double. The Default value of the field. instead of loading all custom fields. long integer. Right-click the table in the map window. Click Add. each corresponding to a field.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table You can add a custom field to any object type’s data table. The context menu appears. or currency) Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. Select Table Fields from the context menu.2 Adding. Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document.14). and Editing Data Table Fields The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. date/time. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and add or delete new ones.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields The fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes: Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database Group: If desired. Type: Select a type for the field (text. To access an object type’s table fields: 1.5. In this section. you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. short integer. the following functions are explained: • • • "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42 "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42 "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 43 1.5. In the Explorer window.5. The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1.

4. 2. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object type’s data table. To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table: Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table.2. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4. Figure 1. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1.15). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.16) or enter a new value. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted. you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1. Click Delete. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field. Select the custom field that you want to delete. Make sure that you are not deleting important information. Your changes are automatically saved. Tip: Some fields can not be deleted.3 Editing the Contents of a Table To edit the contents of a table: 1.14: The Field Definition dialogue 1. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 43 . as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table You can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. 2. Click OK to return to the object type table. 1. 3. 5.5.5. Select Open Table from the context menu. 1. Note: User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation.

3. from its data table. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see. To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object: 1. To avoid editing the record when you double-click. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record.16: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables 1.5 Defining the Table Format Atoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented. 2. or cell.15: Editing data in the transmitters data tables Figure 1. 1. You can change the format of the data table by: • • • • • • "Formatting the Column Headers" on page 45 "Formatting Table Columns" on page 45 "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45 "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 46 "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 46 "Moving Columns" on page 46 44 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual Figure 1.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object. for example. double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself. Select Record Properties from the context menu.5. antenna. a site.5. transmitter.

Click OK. the Type. Select Format > Column Format. and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. 2. When you change the row height. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. The Format dialogue appears. and the Colour for each column header. Effects. The Format dialogue appears. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. When you change the column width. and a pattern from the list box. Click OK. you change the width only for the selected column. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. and Text Colour. To change the column width: 1. 2. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. 2. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.17). To change the row height: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Borders: You can select the Border. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1. font Size. 3. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1. Figure 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Formatting the Column Headers 1. Effects.18). font Size. Borders: You can select the Border. Formatting Table Columns 1. a Background colour. Select Format > Header Format. 3. Outline (the font style). however. you change the row height for every row in the table. and the Colour for each column header. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. by selecting a Foreground colour. Outline (the font style). the Type. 2. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. and Text Colour. by selecting a Foreground colour. 4. a Background colour. 4. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.18: Changing row height © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 45 .17: Changing column width Figure 1. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Changing Column Width or Row Height You can change the column width and row height in a data table.

clear its check box. To move a column: 1. Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table. while scrolling through the Sites table.19). 2. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to move. Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns. or any other column visible. You can keep this column. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Figure 1. you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order. 2. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. you might want to have the Name column always visible. Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. Select Format > Display Columns. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.Atoll User Manual Displaying or Hiding a Column You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide. Select the header of the column you want to move. To unfreeze columns: • Select Format > Unfreeze columns. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to freeze. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Freezing or Unfreezing a Column In Atoll. For example. Click Close. 3. you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally through the table. by freezing it. To display or hide a column: 1. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men. To hide a column. 4. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. select its check box.19: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu. 5. To freeze a column: 1. Moving Columns In Atoll. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 2. 3. To display a column. 46 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

5. 2. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row. the following is explained: • • "Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 47 "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 47. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.6. the position the column will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 47 . 1. 3. using Fill Up or Fill Down. The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables In Atoll. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row. Atoll. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the same data into several cells. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. Figure 1. preceded by "Copy of. 3.20)." You can edit this name. and Paste (CTRL+V) commands on the Edit menu. As you drag the column.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element You can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent. 1. creates a new element from the copied data. To create a new element by copying and pasting: 1. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data (see Figure 1. pasting it into a new row and editing the details that are different. Note: Each element in a table must have a unique Name. 2. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. In this section. Cut (CTRL+X). To paste the same data into several cells: 1.5.5. you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C).20: Moving columns Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh in the Map toolbar for your changes to appear.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells You can paste the same data into several cells. Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area. 4. 1. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon ( ) to select the entire row.21).5.6.

select Edit > Fill > Up (see Figure 1.21: Selecting the cells 3. select Edit > Fill > Down (see Figure 1.23: Copying the contents of the bottom cell 48 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .22). Figure 1. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Figure 1.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.22: Copying the contents of the top cell To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.23).

4. To view a statistical analysis of a selection of cells in one column: Select the cells you want to analyse. Figure 1. you can view the statistical analysis of other cells by selecting them in the table. The entire column is selected. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 49 . CSV.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files You can export entire Atoll data tables. The context menu appears. Select Export from the context menu. You can select contiguous cells by clicking the first cell and dragging to the last cell of the selection you want to analyse. formats) and to MS Excel files. to ASCII text files (in text.24). If you leave the Statistics dialogue open.5. Tip: In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents You can view a statistical analysis of the contents of an entire column in a table or of the contents of a selection of cells.5. TXT. The Export dialogue appears. You can see how the exported table will appear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1. 3. For more information. Select the column data you want to analyse: To view a statistical analysis of an entire column: Click the column title. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last cell. 1. see "Grouping.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1.24: The Statistics dialogue The statistics displayed depend on the type of numerical data selected. 3. The contents of the Statistics dialogue are updated automatically. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. You can select non-contiguous cells by pressing CTRL and clicking each cell in the column separately. Sorting. or by clicking the first cell. The context menu appears. and Filtering Data" on page 56. 2. allowing you to select only certain data. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Right-click the selection of cells. To export a table: 1. or selected columns. Select Statistics from the context menu. To view a statistical analysis of table contents: 1. Right-click the table. and Comma Separated Value. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.25).

The context menu appears. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. Click Save to export the table. 9. You can export the Sites. and Point to Multipoint tables to text files by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+E. To select a field to be exported.9 Importing Tables from Text Files You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables. Select a Field Separator from the list. c. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Multi-Hops. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. select the field in the Exported Fields list and click to remove it. In the Save As dialogue. Right-click the table. Links. 8. For information on importing data into a data table. 1. 2. To import a table: 1. to move it b. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. The next time you export a data table.5. The Save As dialogue appears.25: Exporting a data table 4. 5. 6. 10. a. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data. To change the order of the fields. The fields at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table. 50 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . select the field in the Available Fields box and click to the Exported Fields list. 7. Click Export.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list. Select the fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50.

6. Select a Field Separator from the list. Multi-Hops.5. Select Import from the context menu. Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with. Note: 10. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table. You can import data from text files into the Sites. and Point to Multipoint tables by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+I. Figure 1. you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Links. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box. Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table.26). 8. Note: Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45. Click Import. 9. You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Under Field Mapping.26: Importing information into a data table 5. 4.26). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 51 . these records are not imported.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files You can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. Select <Ignore> for source file columns that you do not want to import.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. The Open dialogue appears. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table. 1. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. If the Update Records check box is not selected. there are two header rows: Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing. The next time you export a data table. Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Destination row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. 7. For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1.

and the Atoll version used to create the XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. 52 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . UMTS. 3. Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed map. For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files.). You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. the XML files and the current Atoll document must use the same system (GSM. choose Selected in the Print dialogue. the technologyTDMA. For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document. and the version of Atoll with which the XML files were created. If you want to print only a selected area. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. document reports. To export all the data tables in your document to XML files: 1..xml file. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index. Do not modify the order of tables in the index. 2. UMTS. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export. Note: Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index. etc. For example.xml file are imported in the document . some data must be imported before other data. Click OK to print. and an index.xml file that contains the mapping between the tables that were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table.. you can print any part of your document. . etc. If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed. For more information about the formats of the XML files.6. including maps.). 4. This section explains the following: • • • "Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 52 "Printing a Map" on page 52 "Printing a Docking Window" on page 56 1. etc. Click OK. To print a table: 1. see "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51. therefore.6 Printing in Atoll In Atoll. If you want to print an area of the table. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import.2 Printing a Map You can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies.Atoll User Manual Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table. data tables. CDMA. 5. antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves. Once the import is complete.6. etc. CDMA. see the Technical Reference Guide. both be printed in the same way. Atoll performs a database integrity check. Select the folder where the index.xml file is located. During the import procedure. 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files.xml file also stores the information on the system (GSM. the technologyTDMA. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored. predictions. Click the Make New Folder button if you want to create a new folder to store the XML files. . see the Technical Reference Guide.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can. 2. etc. 2. 1. existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. Select File > Print. 1. 3.11 Importing Tables from XML Files You can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files. To import data tables into your document from XML files: 1. 3. and antenna patterns.xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important. and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not create database problems. The index. select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to the opposite corner. For more information about the formats of the XML files. Click OK. see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55. including A4 and A0.5. In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files.

when a document contains surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps). it is strongly recommended to put vector layers. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. Before printing for the first time. 2. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. Click the Data tab. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). 4. or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: • • Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53). Antennas. click the Geo tab. 1. such as roads. Before printing a map. For this reason.2.2. When you release the mouse. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows. You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps). b. The context menu appears. or airport). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 53 . 2. 2. Click OK.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Before you print a map.6.6.1 Printing Recommendations The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. however. traffic maps (vector or raster). Select File > Print. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. etc. For performance reasons. DTM. Select the document window containing the map. To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions: 1. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. 5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.): • • • • • • Points (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Surface polygons (vectors) Multi-format maps . To create a printing zone: 1. Objects in Atoll are arranged in layers. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu.population. lines (vectors such as roads. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). Select Draw from the context menu. Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers. you have the following options: • You can print the entire map. If you clear the printing zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window.27). 3. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. for example. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. The context menu appears. and points (measurements. and Transmitters. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites. visible objects on the Data tab. over predictions. 4. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these layers (for information on transparency. transmitters. you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 53 to avoid any memory-related problems. In the Explorer window. 1. sites. To print a map: 1. Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). 3. 3. 4.2 Defining the Printing Zone You can define an area to be printed. The printing zone is delimited by a light green line (see Figure 1. 5. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. geoclimatic. and others Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps) Images. Draw the printing zone: a. You now have the following options before printing the map: You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). This will ensure that these vector layers are visible when you print the map. You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). and predictions. Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer.

On the Print Setup dialogue. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview on the right side of the Print Setup dialogue.27: Printing zone You can also create a printing zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the printing zone. Choose to print the area outside the focus zone. Choose to print the rulers with the map. as well as the page orientation and the margins. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Add a title. comment. logo. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. Note: You can export the printing zone as a polygon. Select paper size and source. Choose to print the legend. Note: If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a printing zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Printing Zone from the context menu. Select File > Print Setup. 54 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To define the appearance of the map when it is printed: 1. • Once you have created a printing zone. you can: • • • • • • Set the scale of the map. You define the print set up on the Page tab.3 Defining the Print Layout You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then import the next time you print a similar document. by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. These settings can be saved as a configuration. 1. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. you can import it and use it as a printing zone. or footer. For more information on the polygon editing tools. and the Header/Footer tab. header. the Components tab.6. The Print Setup dialogue appears. You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulers of the map window.2. you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings.

Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. Under Margins. select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape. Click the Components tab. 1. Note: You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration. Under Legend. and orientation and the scale of the printed map: a. select the On the map check box. v. you can define graphics that appear for the map. For the selected check box. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. you can define the page size. By default. - Click a Font button to open the Font dialogue to define the font of the legend. Under Scaling. it is considered as the default header logo.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 2. Select the Comments check box if you want to print a comment with the map and set its Position. you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format.3 © Forsk 2010 Previewing Your Printing When you want to print maps. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. Click the Page tab. Click File. Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the focus zone. d. The Logo dialogue appears. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2. c. you can preview your printing. set the margins of the page in millimetres. Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position. in the form of a BMP graphic.bmp is present in this folder. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position. b. Click the Header/Footer tab. If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it). 3. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels). Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page. b. c. select the On the map check box. iv. Click OK. select the On the map check box. 4. The buttons outside of the square will place the legend outside of the map. i. On the Page tab. If your logo is in a different format. Select the Legend check box if you want to print a legend with the map. iii. optionally. you can define the placement of the legend. ii. or reports. On the Header/Footer tab. The graphics can be a company logo or other information.6. a. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it). Under Paper. However. you can select a different file. If you want the comment to appear on the map (and not outside of it). or by selecting Scale and defining the scale. you can define the appearance of the printed map: Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it. such as copyright information. Click a button to set the Position of the legend. data tables. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them. the Source of the paper. c. b. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 55 . margins. Under Orientation. Once you have made your settings. The Open dialogue appears. a. The buttons inside the square will place the legend on top of the map. select the Size of the paper and. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open. or click Print to print the document. If a file named logo. click the Properties button. click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue. you can set the position of graphic elements. Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. Under Map. 5.

The docking windows whose contents you can print are: • • • • • Legend Window (for more information on this tool. and Filtering Data In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways. Click Two Page to display two pages side by side Click One Page to display a single page. see "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24) Point Analysis Tool CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool. This section explains: • • • "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 56 "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57 "Advanced Grouping" on page 58. Select File > Print Preview.6. sort. After you have defined how you will group. Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview. you can save this information as a folder configuration. see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide. you can click one of the following buttons: Click Print to open the Print dialogue. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. or filter data quickly by one criterion. If you want to print a Point Analysis window. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. For examples of grouping data objects. At the top of the Print Preview window. Click OK to print. or by several. You can also define the properties by which you can group objects. Open the docking window you want to print. sort. Right-click the window you wish to print. for example. The objects to be grouped can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71). you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties on all grouped objects. Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview. In this section the following will be explained: • • • • • "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56 "Sorting Data" on page 60 "Filtering Data" on page 62 "Folder Configurations" on page 69 "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71 1. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data table because it puts all records with the selected property together.Atoll User Manual To preview your printing: 1.1 Grouping Data Objects You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window.1.7. 1. as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 52. or filter data. Select Print from the context menu. Atoll allows you to group. 2. 56 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the map or table you want to print. 2.7. 1.7 Grouping. selecting File > Print only prints the contents of a document window. The Print dialogue appears. Click Next Page to display the following page Click Prev Page to display the previous page. Sorting. click the tab of the study you want to print. 4. 3. modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. For information.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu.4 Printing a Docking Window You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu. see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) To print the content of a docking window: 1. The Print Preview window appears. 1. allowing you to select only certain data and then. Drive Test Data Analysis Tool Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool. Once you have grouped data objects.

28: The Configuration dialogue 6. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. From the context menu. To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu. The context menu appears. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Grouping Fields list. 4. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 57 . You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. 3. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To group data objects by a selected property: 1. Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. To undo the grouping: 1. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields. Figure 1. To change the order of the fields. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. such as transmitters. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 3. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the properties that are relevant for grouping. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. select the property by which you want to group the objects.7. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group By submenu. See "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. From the Group By submenu. 1. select from the Group By > None. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Select Properties from the context menu. 2. 2. 2.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu Some data objects.1.28). 7. select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click to remove it. To configure the Group By submenu: 1. 5. from top to bottom. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. The Group By submenu will now contain only the fields you selected. For information on using the dialogue that appears. 3. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list. The Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.

To group data objects by one or more properties: 1. To change the order of the fields. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.4 Advanced Grouping You can group data objects by one or more properties. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. 3.Atoll User Manual 1.7. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. Select Properties from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.1. 5.29).29: Grouping microwave links by site To restore normal display of microwave links: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped.30: The Group dialogue 6. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately.1.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site You can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue.7. Right-click the Links folder. 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. select the field in the Group these fields in this order list and click to remove it. 58 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To select a field to be used to group the objects. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list. 2. 2.30). 3. The context menu appears. Figure 1. Figure 1. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. 1. To group microwave links by site: 1. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link and sorts the links by site (see Figure 1. 3. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. 4. 4. from top to bottom. Click the Group By button. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.

Figure 1. in the Explorer window. transmitters. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped.7. you can only see a very long list of transmitters under the Transmitter folder. select from the Group By > None. 1. While it is easy to see on the map which transmitters are part of which site.32.32: Transmitters grouped by site © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 59 . there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. From the context menu. To undo the grouping: 1. 3. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1.31).5 Examples of Grouping In this example. therefore.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 7.1. Figure 1. you can group the transmitters by the site they are located on.31: Grouping transmitters by site The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1.

Once you have sorted data objects. 10 to 1) order.34: Transmitters grouped by site 1. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Polygon > Focus Zone (Figure 1. Figure 1. 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A. Atoll sorts the records by the first column and then. By grouping them by computation or focus zone.33: Grouping transmitters by zone The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1.32.7.2 Sorting Data In Atoll. The transmitters are now in two groups: those inside the focus zone and those outside the focus zone.Atoll User Manual You can also group objects by the computation or focus zone.1 Sorting Data in Tables When sorting data in tables. you can save the settings as a folder configuration. Figure 1. within each group of identical values in the first column. the transmitters you are working on are immediately visible under the Transmitter folder. For information.2. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69.7. you can sort by one column or by several columns. You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. When you sort data by several columns. you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. when you are working on a certain area of the network.31). You can sort the data in ascending (A to Z. 60 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll then sorts the records by the second column. This section explains the following: • • "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 "Advanced Sorting" on page 61 1. for example. you can group the transmitters in the focus zone together. You normally create a computation or focus zone when you want to concentrate on a given subset of transmitters. and so on.

Right-click the column headers. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. b. The context menu appears. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61.35). Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest value. Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns. Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. For information. For each other column you want to sort on: a. Click OK. 8. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest value. 7. Sorting by Several Columns You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. 1. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest value. From the context menu.7. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. The entire column is selected. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1.2 Advanced Sorting You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue. Click the Sort button. To sort data in a table by several columns: 1. 2. To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue: 1. The context menu appears 3. 4. For the first column you want to sort on: a. 6. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest value. From the context menu. you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 61 . Select the column name from the And by list. 4. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent. 2. 4. you can move the columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 46.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Sorting by One Column To sort data in a table by one column: 1. 2. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. The entire column is selected. 3.2. The context menu appears. Right-click the column header. Select the column name from the Sort by list. 5. b.

see "Folder Configurations" on page 69.37 on page 63). You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. 1.36 on page 62). press CTRL as you click the other values.7.3. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1. To filter a data table on one or more fields: 1. 3.7. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1. Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed. Once you have selected one or more values.36: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209) 62 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .35: The Sort dialogue 1. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. you can filter data according to one or several criteria. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. Select one of the following from the Records menu: Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. This section explains the following: • • • • "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62 "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63 "Restoring All Records" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64. 2. For information. To select more than one value. - Figure 1. Select the value to filter on.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values.3 Filtering Data In Atoll. you can choose to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value.

38).7. Underneath each column name. To create an advanced filter: 1. enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table: Formula =X <> X <X Data are kept in the table only if value equal to X (X may be a number or characters) value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters) numerical value is less than X © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 63 .Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 4.3. Under Values to Include. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.38: The Filter dialogue .37: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209) 1. Click the Filter tab: a. you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select Records > Advanced Filter.2 Advanced Data Filtering You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. In the Column row. Click the Advanced tab: a. select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. b. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. 2. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 1.Advanced tab b. Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. Figure 1. 3. Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue. The Filter dialogue appears. Select a Field from the list.

7. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined.3. 1. To restore all records: • Select Records > Remove Filter. See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.7. Filters are combined first horizontally. it is not necessary because there is only one manufacturer with a "K. you will find a few examples of advanced filtering: • • • "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 65 "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 65. as shown in Figure 1.40. you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again.3 Restoring All Records After you have applied filter criteria to records. 64 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual Formula >X <=X >=X *X* X* Data are kept in the table only if numerical value is greater than X numerical value is less than or equal to X numerical value is greater than or equal to X text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5." The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°. the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.3.3.4. To do this.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples In this section. Figure 1. there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics. 1. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°.40. then vertically. While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"). is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").39: Initial table The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. 1.7.1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1 In this example. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63): • The first criterion. • • The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth under 100° but over 50°.

see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63). however.3.42. it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.40.41: Errors in filtering As previously stated. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").40. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").41.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) is malformed. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. or all antennas over 50°. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.4. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. however. with "> 50" placed under "< 100".7. Figure 1. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.2 Advanced Filtering: Example 2 In this example. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 65 . 1. in this case.4. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64.3. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. The resulting filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63). all antennas are displayed. in this case.3 Advanced Filtering: Example 3 In this example.7.40: Advanced filtering 1. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. However.

the filter only generates an error message and no antennas are filtered out. Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file. However. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67 "Importing a User Configuration" on page 67. you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor. The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. orthogonality factor. Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. standard deviations. map display settings (such as.4 User Configurations In Atoll. • • Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document. you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll document open. clutter description (code. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session. grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings. such as geographic data. and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. tips text. height. is not stored in the database. etc. the filtering zone." Because the file is in XML (eXtensible Markup Language). You can create a user configuration file. indoor loss. • • For a detailed description of the user configuration file. 1. and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display settings). see the Administrator Manual.42: Errors in filtering As previously stated. In this section.7. When you create a user configuration file. 66 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can export the following information: • Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps. Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the raster maps. to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings. Macros: The complete path of any macros. however. and not to a specific Atoll document. the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are being exported in the user configuration file. Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links. default standard deviations. because the second criterion is malformed. name.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Folder configurations: Sorting. If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database. the information stored in a user configuration. even if not saved). transparency. you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in another document. the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class.). the visibility scale.

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 67 .7.43: Exporting a user configuration 2. Figure 1.44).4. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. The folder configuration has been saved. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. Once you have created a site list. you can create lists of sites. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. 3. 4. The Save As dialogue appears. Click OK.5 Site Lists In Atoll. 2.1 Exporting a User Configuration You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file. To import a user configuration: 1.4. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import.44: Importing a user configuration 4. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.2 Importing a User Configuration You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created. To export a user configuration: 1. Figure 1. you can modify the list and use it to filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export.7. 3. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import. as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67.43).7. 5. 1. 1. it into your current Atoll document. The Open dialogue appears. The user configuration is imported. Click OK. Click Open. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import.

5. The Site Lists table appears.1 Creating a Site List You can create lists of sites that you can then use to filter the data displayed. To add a site to a list: 1. The selected site will be added to the new list. Tip: You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 62. site lists can be stored in the database. right-click the site you want to add to a list. 3.7. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the map window. you can select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. Click OK. 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Sites folder to expand the folder. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to create a site list: a. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. In the map window. Click OK. 2. 5. you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . A dialogue appears. When you open a document from a database. To create a site list: 1. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Site List" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window" on page 68 "Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone" on page 68 "Editing a Site List" on page 69 "Filtering on a Site List" on page 69. Then. In this section. 1. In a large radio-planning project. The context menu appears. A dialogue appears. 4. 1.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. 1.5. b.5. Right-click the Sites folder. by right-clicking the Sites folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List from the context menu.7. 2. The site is added to the selected list. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). 2.5.4 68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone You can add the sites contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list. this allows you to more effectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.7. The selected site will be added to the new list. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.7. 3. 3. Right-click the site you want to add to the list. The site is added to the selected list. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu.Atoll User Manual In a multi-user environment. To add a site to a list: 1.

The Properties dialogue appears. Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display. right-click the zone and select the following from the context menu: Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. The Properties dialogue appears. b. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder. 7. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The sites contained in the zone are added to the selected list. You can use a filtering. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. In this section. Only sites that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Data tab of the Explorer window and in the map window. 5. 1. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. or filtered are referred to as a folder configuration. To delete a site from the list: a. allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping. or geographic export zone. there will be an additional tab: Sites: Click the Site Lists tab.5. You can now edit the list: To add a site to the list: Select the name of the site in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). Click in the left margin of the row containing the site to select it. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 3.7. 1. Click OK when you have finished editing the site list. The context menu appears. the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. A dialogue appears. 1. 5. 2. click the Filter button. The selected site will be added to the new list. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 that contains the sites you want to add to a list. The context menu appears. The Filter dialogue appears. 2. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties. or sorting criteria. You can define folder configurations and save them.7. 8. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add the sites contained in a zone to a list: 1.6 Filtering on a Site List You can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites folder. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. To edit a site list: 1.5. If you have created a list. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To filter folder contents using a site list: 1. 3. computation. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 69 . focus. 6. printing. filtering.5 Editing a Site List You can edit a site list using the Site List table. The Site Lists table appears. 3. sorted. Press DEL to delete the site from the list. 2. Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 71.7.6 Folder Configurations In Atoll. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 4. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to edit a site list: a. b. Click OK.

To reapply the folder configuration: 1.5 Importing a Folder Configuration Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70.7.Atoll User Manual 1.7.7. If you have not yet done so. or sorted a data folder. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu.6. 4. filtered. 7. click Save. To export a folder configuration: 1. you can export it as part of a user configuration to an external file. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply.43 on page 67). If you then add or modify data. 8. If you want to export other configurations at the same time. 5. set the following parameters as desired: Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from the Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue.44 on page 67). To create a configuration: 1. 1. 2. select those check boxes as well. 3. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.1 Creating a Folder Configuration In Atoll. you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped.7. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. On the Configurations submenu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The folder configuration has been saved. The Save As dialogue appears. 3. you save it to the current ATL document. Select Properties from the context menu.6. select the name of the configuration you want to apply. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 4. the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. The folder configuration is applied to the current folder. To apply a saved folder configuration: 1. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder.6. 3. In this case. 2. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 70 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1. 6.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration If you have grouped. 3. Select the Folder Configuration check box. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 2. you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. However. 4. To import a folder configuration: 1.6.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration When you create a folder configuration. or sorted as a folder configuration. Select the Folder Configuration check box.7. 1. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The context menu appears. so that it can be used in other documents. Under Configuration. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. The Open dialogue appears. 2.6. The previously configured folder configuration is reapplied to the data. Click OK. 1. 2. you can import it into your current document. you have created and applied a folder configuration. Click Open. filtered. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save.

sorting. 5. sorting. When you delete a subfolder. 3. 3. Tip: If you have created several subfolders. Tip: If.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders You can compare the effects of different grouping. you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calculations. Click Delete. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object folder in which it was created. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62).6. The data objects are not displayed on the map. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone In Atoll. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK. the data reappear under the initial folder. select those check boxes as well. select the name of the configuration from the list. To create a subfolder of a folder: 1. How the objects are displayed on the map will change. Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder.7. To compare subfolders: 1. 1. sorting. For information on renaming an object. or filtering settings. or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. or filtering settings of the selected subfolder.7. 4. The folder configuration is deleted. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu.Chapter 1: The Working Environment If you want to import other configurations at the same time. depending on the different grouping. 2. by displaying in turn each subfolder. you can compare the differences. 1. You can remove subfolders by deleting them.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration You can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 71 . 2. after deleting the last subfolder. clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. To delete a folder configuration: 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. The data objects of the selected subfolder. Under Configuration. right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of. The folder configuration is imported. you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. 6. By limiting the number of sites. Caution: When you delete a folder configuration. 5. or filtering settings. Atoll will not ask for confirmation. the data do not reappear under the initial folder. with its associated grouping. To delete a subfolder: • Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu. For more information on display properties. leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. Select the check box of one of the subfolders. you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name. with its grouping. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder content. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete.7. are displayed on the map. 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. sorting. 2. the data contained are not deleted. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. it is deleted immediately. When you delete the last subfolder. on the map.

coverage predictions. propagation models.3 Searching for Objects on the Map Atoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. antennas. for example. maps. To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map: • Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5. measurement paths. or links) by their name. moving a transmitter. a microwave link. For example. If you perform an action that can not be undone. The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. ). repeaters or remote antennas. transmitters. deleting. you can search for a site. the Undo and Redo histories are erased. when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter. up to a maximum of 10 actions. When you have applied a polygon filter. a simulation. 1. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data and reapply the current configurations to folders. for example. pasting in tables. to indicate that the For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone. To redo an action that you have undone: • Select Edit > Redo.3. repeaters. using the Find toolbar. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( folder contents have been filtered. you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll: • • • • • • • "Undoing and Redoing" on page 72 "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 72 "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 72 "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 73 "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 74 "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74 "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75. 1.).8 Tips and Tricks In this section. the data displayed on the map or in the Explorer window. You can search for some objects (sites.8. links. groups of hexagons. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw a new filtering zone. 72 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites. transmitters. etc. modifying the antenna azimuth. and moving a site.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name: • • sites microwave links. you can undo or redo: • • Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders Under certain circumstances. or a vector by any text field.8. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x and y coordinates. you can perform the following actions on the filtered data: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). 1.8.1 Undoing and Redoing You can undo or redo most actions in Atoll. may not be actual. On the Data tab of the Explorer window.8.Atoll User Manual objects on the map clearer. 1. This section explains: • • • "Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 72 "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73 "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 73. By using the Location Finder. see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29. a station or a group of stations. 1. or deleting a transmitter. Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records. • To undo an action: • Select Edit > Undo.

3. From the Find list. select it and then select Delete from the context menu.8. select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window. 1. or in the clutter classes).45): • • • • the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system) the altitude (as defined in the DTM) the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties) the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file. To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder: 1.. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link 3. about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the status bar (see Figure 1. including sites that are presently filtered out. Under Criteria. If you wish to search all the sites in the search. Click OK. 2. ) on the toolbar.3 Searching for a Point on the Map You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i. Note: To remove the point icon ( ). 4.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar: 1. From the Find list. 1. Click OK.3. see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73. The Location Finder dialogue appears. To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder: 1. You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* *X names which contain X names which start with X names which end with X 4. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 73 .4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information Atoll displays the following information. Enter the name of the object in the Named box. Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it. non-numeric) property: • • • sites microwave links vectors. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar. 1. select the Include all the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box. 4. choose Point. Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder. Press ENTER. using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81). From the Find list. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window. Atoll marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window.8. For information. if available. The Location Finder dialogue appears. Click the Location Finder button ( 2. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link Vector 3. You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. 3.e.8.

The Save As dialogue appears. If the Event Viewer is not displayed. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys (see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75). Select Save As. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. and select a file type from the Save as type list. Click and drag to select several events. The selected events are saved in the text file. and error ( ) messages. For more information about these settings.8. The Event Viewer displays information ( ). enter a File name. 3.Atoll User Manual X-Y coordinates Altitude (from DTM) Clutter class Figure 1. select a destination folder. You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in the Event viewer. see the Administrator Manual. as well as the progress of calculations. 2. Move the map window (CTRL+D) 74 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . select View > Event Viewer to display it. 5. Right-click the select event(s). To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file: 1. 6. 4. The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below: • In the Standard toolbar Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N) Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O) Save the current document (CTRL+S) Cut the selected data (CTRL+X) Copy the selected data (CTRL+C) Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V) Undo the last modification (CTRL + Z) Redo the previous undone modification (CTRL + Y) Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P) Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P) Open the About Atoll dialogue • In the Map toolbar Select area Refresh display of map and folders (F5) Disable zooming and panning tools. 1.8. warning ( ).45: Information displayed in the status bar 1. You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file. In the Save As dialogue.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar You can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar. Click OK.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer Atoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. The context menu appears.

a tool tip appears. Create a new multipoint microwave link.8. see "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 75 . giving a short description. Create a new multi-hop microwave link. • In the Vector Edition toolbar Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab) Select the vector layer to edit Draw a new polygon Draw a new rectangle Draw a new line Draw points Merge several vector polygons Cut out areas in polygons Create new polygon from overlapping areas Split one polygon along the drawn lines. Note: When you place the cursor over an icon. Currently selected microwave link model Activate the microwave link profile analysis window Show or hide victim and interferer links Show or hide site parities Stop the calculations in progress • In the Search toolbar Centre site in the map window. The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon. 1.7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll Atoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+R) Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W) Turn on tool tips Measure distances on the map Location finder Display a point-to-point profile • In the Microwave link toolbar Create a new microwave link.

click CTRL+SHIFT+N: Create a new document from an existing database CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (in the toolbar. click ) ) ALT+F8: Open the Add-ins and Macros dialogue F3: Select the Find Site tool. Multi-Hops. CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (in the toolbar. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. click CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (in the toolbar. Links. Multi-Hops. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder to a text file. click CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (in the toolbar. click CTRL+A: Select all records in a table CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (in the toolbar. F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select ) • Using the Function Keys - Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name. click CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (in the toolbar. click ) ) ) ) ) • CTRL+S: Save the current active document (in the toolbar. click CTRL+P: Print the current window (in the toolbar.Atoll User Manual • Using the CTRL key: CTRL++: Zoom in on the map (in the toolbar. click →: Next zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. Links. click CTRL+D: In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells In the map window: Move the map window (in the toolbar. click ) ) and click the map) and right-click the map) CTRL+E: Export the table of the selected Sites. click CTRL+–: Zoom out on the map (in the toolbar. click CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (in the toolbar. click CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification (in the toolbar. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder from a text file. 76 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table CTRL+I: Import the table of the selected Sites. For more information. click ) ) Using the ALT key: ALT+ ALT+ ←: Previous zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. click ) ) ) CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification (in the toolbar. For more information.

Chapter 2 Starting an Atoll Project .

Atoll User Manual 78 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology.1 Templates Available Depending on your configuration of Atoll. making the changes necessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template. The exact procedure for creating a new Atoll document from a database differs. from any technology template. WiMAX. TD-SCDMATD-SCDMATD-SCDMA • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 79 . 2. antennas. microwave radio links. for example.2 Creating an Atoll Document Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling. For more information on geographic data. the following templates are available: • Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links. the database you connect to has been created with the technology and data you need.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template You can create a new Atoll document from a template. technology-specific parameters. depending on the database containing the data. For information on starting a document from a database. clutter heights.1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project For every microwave-planning project you must assemble the information necessary: • • • Microwave equipment: sites. coordinate systems. see the technology-specific chapters. Atoll can work with several common databases. In this section.2. certain geo data or antennas.1. Microwave data: frequency bands. see the technology-specific chapters. you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have worked on. Once the necessary data have been assembled. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for. population maps. Geographic data: clutter classes.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2 Starting an Atoll Project When you want to start a new project. For information on creating a document from a template. CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. DTM. Once you have started your new Atoll project. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template. the objects that are available are appropriate for the technology. For more information onmicrowave data.2. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84. you can create the Atoll document. as part of a complete mobile telecommunications network. the tabs in the transmitter Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 79. Atoll is delivered with a template for each technology you will be planning for. For example. You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised with. For more information on equipment. you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the technology you are using. this template is provided to enable you to create a project of only microwave radio links. UMTS HSPA. In this chapter. As well. Atoll enables you to find the file and repair the link. However. Working with a database allows several users to share the same data while at the same time managing data consistency. you create an Atoll document in one of two ways: • From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template. and other equipment. and LTE. • From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database. it may happen that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project". For example. the following are explained: • • "Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project" on page 79 "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 79. you can modify the network parameters to meet your particular needs. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS. 2. Once you have selected the appropriate template for your microwave-planning project. the following are explained: • • • "Templates Available" on page 79 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80 "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81 2. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files. etc. etc. or you can open it from the Open dialogue. 2. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81). The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included with your Atoll installation. When you open an existing project. UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX are only available in GSM-TDMA documents.

47: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2.48 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document.46: New Atoll document based on a template Figure 2. the document is not connected to a database. respectively. 2.46 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. among other UMTSUMTS-specific elements.47 and Figure 2. Atoll creates a new document based on the template selected. The dialogue in Figure 2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template To create a new document from a template: 1. To verify whether the document is connected to a database: • Select File > Database > Connection Properties. 80 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .49 appears.48: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a template. with. Select File > New > From a Document Template. Figure 2. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project.1. folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll. The Project Templates dialogue appears. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK.Atoll User Manual 2.2. These can be modified or replaced. Figure 2. Figure 2.

The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document. a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. direction. United States Government Printing Office..2. but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). Snyder.C. 1982. Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey.49: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database 2. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that lay primarily east to west. thus. you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the display coordinate system. John. yard. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data files. thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance.. • A geographic system is not a projection. Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems In Atoll.1. The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). Atoll distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display. such as basic measurement units. D. By default. In this section. etc. You can accept the default values for some parameters. the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 81 . scale. you can see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system.50.). A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds). By choosing a specific display system. In Figure 2. the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported.2. Washington. but you must set projection and display coordinate systems. the following are explained: • • • "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81 "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82 "Setting Measurement Units" on page 82 2. 1. This projection cannot be done without distortion. This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south. area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). 313 pages. You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map.3 Defining a New Atoll Document Once you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80.1. 2nd Edition. On the other hand. Two projection systems are widely used: • The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two standard parallels. the same coordinate system is used for both.3. or he must compromise on several characteristics1. The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter. P.

3. Select Tools > Options. The Options dialogue appears.3. 6. only cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. projection and display coordinate systems are the same.2. select a catalogue from the Find in list. For example: • • • • 26°56’29. 2.1. but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish.93914N +26. Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.2. The Coordinate Sys- 3. If not. click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Display field and repeat step 3. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display. transmission. or you can change them using the Options dialogue.4 Setting Measurement Units When you create a new Atoll document. On the Coordinates tab. you must convert them to a single cartographic system. To define the coordinate system: 1.1. Click OK.9’’N 26d56m29. ) to the right of the Projection field. 2. Click OK. by default.3. distance.3 Selecting the Degree Display Format Atoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats.2 Setting a Coordinate System Because you are working with maps.2. in the Display field as well. The Options dialogue appears. 5.93914 To change the degree display format: 1. to step 5. Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites.50: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and. Select Tools > Options. You can accept these default measurement units.1. you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document. Select a coordinate system from the list. and offset to internal defaults. 4. By default. 2. 82 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . select the format from the Degree Format list. On the Coordinates tab. both cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. click the Browse button ( tems dialogue appears. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue.9sN 26. For the projection system. For the display system. Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems.3. 2. 2. height.

connected over a network: • A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed. 2. i. Since geographic data files are usually large. The connection to the reference database is reactivated only when necessary. and have access to the shared path loss matrices folder. they are usually linked to an Atoll file. or groups of users. work simultaneously on given parts of a single. the following are explained: • • • • • "The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 83 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84 "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 86 "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose. the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all the individual Atoll users or groups of users. modified. modified. can be detected and resolved. you are working on data that you are sharing with other users. usually store these modifications locally. they are stored externally.e.2. Consequently. 2. refresh their projects from the data stored in the database. since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users. Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database into your new document and then disconnects it from the database. worked on. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users. and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator. • - • User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and managed by each user. so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. For example. there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document. Click OK. When you create a new Atoll document from a database. thus ensuring access to the database by other users.2. users can modify their projects. It is initiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator. load only the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file. and archive their modifications in the database. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 83 .2 Working in a Multi-User Environment A multi-user environment is one where a number of users.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project To set the measurement units: 1. Users who modify geographic data locally. large (may be nation-wide) network. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the network. Through this central Atoll project. On the Units tab. The Options dialogue appears. Select Tools > Options. when you archive your changes to the database. Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are then accessed. When you work on a document created from a database. 2. for example). for example. Once the database is in place. select the desired unit for the following measurements: Reception Transmission Distance Height and offset 3.. for example.2. the changes you have made may occasionally interfere with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict. The shared data are mainly of the following three types: The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents. and updated by the Atoll administrator. In this section. and is then subdivided into sections on which users or groups of users can work simultaneously. modified or deleted records. editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment An Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements. Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast access connection. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database.

2.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.51: Components of Multi-user Environments Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database. and Server. select the option corresponding to the type of your database. Atoll can work with the following databases: • • • • • Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Microsoft Data Link files The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data: • • "Connecting to a Database" on page 84. 2. 2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database When you create a new document from a database. In the Files of type list. The Data to Load dialogue appears.2. in order to allow other users access to the database.2. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load. allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85). "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85. An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in: • "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 2. Then the connected is interrupted. Once connected.2. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. Atoll loads the database into a new Atoll document.2. you must connect to the database. a dialogue may appear where you can enter your User Name. 3. The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. Depending on the type of the database. see the Administrator Manual. 84 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . A new connection with the database will be created only when necessary. Click OK. Password.1 Connecting to a Database To create a new document from a database: 1.

If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document created from a database can have additional data. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database When you create a new document from a database. Custom Fields Groups. and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu. These can be modified or replaced.54 and Figure 2. Figure 2. unlike a document created from a template. respectively.3 Working With a Document on a Database Figure 2.52: Selecting the data to load 2. and Neighbour to load.2.2.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the document in the Data to load dialogue. Figure 2.2.55 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document.2. Atoll will also load the associated exceptional pairs table. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 85 . This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin.53 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database. Figure 2. such as sites. rightclicking on any site.53: New Atoll document opened from a database Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window. You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder. You can select which Project. Site List.2.

2. The Refresh dialogue appears. see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that you have not modified in your document. Notes: • • If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database. For information on using the Archive dialogue. you can view the characteristics of the database connection. Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation.2. If the database is updated frequently. You can now: Disconnect your document from the database. In the dialogue. To view the characteristics of the database connection: 1. Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database. To refresh an Atoll document from the database: 1.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database As you are working on your document.55: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a database. the Archive dialogue appears. You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database. 2. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database.54: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2. Figure 2. If you chose Archive your changes in the database. you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved those changes in the database: Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead of refreshing your document from the server. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see Figure 2. you should refresh your document frequently as well. 86 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .2. How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database.56: The Database Connection dialogue 2. Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made and start over from the point of the last archive to the database. other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data.Atoll User Manual Figure 2. - Modify your connection to the database. in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data.56).

2. Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them. when you archive your changes. However. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish. 2. Occasionally. you can archive only some of them or even undo modifications you have made locally. For example.2. other users might have modified some of the same data and. and opens it. and neighbours. Under Take into account. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database To archive all your modifications in the database: 1. when you are archiving. The report lists all the modifications (deletions. Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. If you selected to generate a report. The document is refreshed according to the selected options. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 87 . because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2. 4. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to you. Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporary files system folder. to refresh.5. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. you can generate a report for the refresh process. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. In this section. transmitters. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology you are working with. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. As well. allowing you to create a new Atoll document with the given antennas. and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or opened your document. the number of other users using the database who may benefit from your modifications.57). you should from time to time archive the modifications you have made to the data on the database. etc. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. click Close.2.2. you can select the neighbour lists. the following are explained: • • • "Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 87 "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 87 "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. 2. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh. you can have read access to the antennas table. if you wish. How frequently you should archive your document depends on several factors: the amount and size of changes you make. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict.2.5. When you are finished archiving. 2. For information on managing conflicts. In the Archive dialogue.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 3. The Atoll archiving process is flexible.57: The Archive dialogue 3.2. For example.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database Atoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. the site-related data are: sites. 4. in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project. additions. 2. cells. you will not be able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database When you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database. Figure 2. Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-technology Neighbours. 5. Click OK.

In the Archive dialogue. Atoll will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again. The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. and archives all other modifications.58. Abort: If you click Abort.58: Conflict warning You have three options: • Ignore: If you click Ignore. You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting the archiving process. if conflicts are found in other tables. as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column. There are two different types of data conflicts: On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed.5. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. When Atoll finds a conflict. the procedure to resolve the conflict is the same. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. Ignore All: If you click Ignore All. it displays the warning shown in Figure 2. Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived. When you are finished archiving.Atoll User Manual To archive only the site-related data in the database: 1. However. the archiving process stops. this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. 4. When the second user attempts to archive his changes. 2. 2.2. 88 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .2. select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve.59). To resolve data conflicts one by one: 1. or wait until the end of the archive process. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. The Archive dialogue appears. Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data and that there is a conflict. and continues with the next table. you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values column. 3. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. In the Conflict in Changes dialogue. with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2. Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived. Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. However. A conflict is caused only by differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document. Figure 2. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. For information on managing conflicts. archives all other modifications in the table. • • Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately. click Close.3 Resolving Data Conflicts Atoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database for other users. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict.

In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. Select one of the following: Figure 2. - - On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 89 . 2. For information. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the database (see Figure 2. thereby recreating the deleted record. No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document.59: The Conflict in Changes dialogue If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. overwriting the value there.61: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your document with values from the database.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2.61). Atoll displays a message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2.60: Conflict on a deleted record Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database. No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from your document. To resolve all the data conflicts: 1. select any conflict and click Resolve All. clear the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. If you want to accept the value of the field in the database. 2. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. Select one of the following: Figure 2. Your modification will be written to the database. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue.60). Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain unchanged. select the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive.

62).. If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box. For example. 4 GB under 64-bit operating systems) memory allocation. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving the back up of your file every time (see Figure 2. Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents.Atoll User Manual 2. You can define the update interval each time you start Atoll. 90 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Consequently. If you click Cancel. Once you have saved the document. the following are explained: • • "Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 90 "Recovering a Backup" on page 91. each document will have its own 2 GB allocated memory. Select the Activate automatic backup check box. these documents will use the same 2 GB memory pool. If you save the original document manually. Click OK." Atoll will create a backup file called "filename. 5. If you are performing calculations. Atoll prompts you each time before backing up the document.atl. In this section. For more information. Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. for a document named "filename. if you have a lot of documents open.1 Configuring Automatic Backup You can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session.atl. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. Atoll skips the backup once.63). you can optimise the process by opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions. you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2. When you have activated automatic backup.e. coverage predictions or simulations. 4.3 Making a Backup of Your Document Atoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. the automatic backup is delayed until the calculations have ended.63: Automatic backup prompt The automatic backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed.62: Automatic backup configuration dialogue 2. the timer is reset to 0.bak" in the same folder as the original document. Figure 2. Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer every time a backup file is updated.ini file. 2.3. see the Administrator Manual. 3. Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session. instead of in the same Atoll session. Therefore. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup. However. If you click OK. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions. You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option in the atoll. Enter a time interval. between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every text box. i. in minutes. Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. This also improves memory management because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems. this operation can take a long time. Figure 2. To configure automatic backup: 1.

2 Recovering a Backup You can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document. coverage predictions. 3. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file. Once the portable archive is created.dbf file corresponding to the extended path loss matrices. or by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll document. Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file. It is. Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu. simulation results. Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for making a portable document because they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATL file. 2.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss. etc. The pathloss. geographic data files are stored on a common file server and are linked to the ATL documents of different users over a network. measurement data. If necessary.bak". For example. Geographic data that are found outside folders on the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder. it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent. enter a File name for the archive to be created. it opens the extracted ATL file.losses" folder containing a pathloss. To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. The Save As dialogue appears.3. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive. Atoll creates a ZIP file containing: A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file). geographic data. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears. Select File > Save to Zip. your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. you could change the name to "filename-backup. it creates the subfolders required for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. therefore." Important: If you just remove the BAK extension. Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. more useful to make a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files.atl. you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool.dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive in Atoll.atl. In most working environments. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. such as a file server over a network. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backup was saved. To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. 4. 5. 2. This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders on the Geo tab. If the original document was named "filename. 2. Using Windows Explorer. memory consumption. and performance reasons. If the geographic data files linked to the document are located on a remote computer. Therefore. and data present within folders on the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders.). Often these geographic data files are quite large. Click OK.zip)" from the Save as type list. A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available on the Geo tab of the Explorer window for the Atoll document. 3. The Open dialogue appears. Select File > Open from Zip." the backup document will be in the same folder and will be called "filename. A ". Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects You can create portable Atoll documents in two ways: • • by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 91 . 2. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored. The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices. and select "Zip Files (*. Click Open. To recover your backup document: 1. they are first copied to the local computer in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive.atl. navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup. and it is not feasible to embed these files in an ATL file due to file size. Open the renamed backup document in Atoll.

92 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . such as WinZip or WinRAR. The highest compression level is used when creating the archive. installed on the computer for this feature.Atoll User Manual Notes: • • You do not need to have a compression utility.

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data .

Atoll User Manual 94 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Lines. Therefore. clutter heights. discrete values. Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document. This enables you to update the original files and. clutter classes. and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can import or create. recompact the file. through the process of saving them. such as clutter classes. Other types such as scanned images. clutter classes. and Points" on page 96 "Scanned Images" on page 96 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 96 Digital Terrain Model The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. or points. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo data objects back to the original files. define how the geo data will be displayed. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used data types. you can edit the data. Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type. are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study. choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3 Managing Geographic Data Several different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. 3. lines. scanned images. Geographic data used for display purposes: In this section. deciding the priority of data files with different information or different resolutions. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation model during computations. you can decide in which folder it goes. You can also create raster-based geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes. railways. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value. for example. You can also create and edit geographic data. either by transferring them to the Data tab. You can also create your own data type by importing a file and defining what data is to be used. and Points" on page 106 "Scanned Images" on page 107 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108 "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109 "Editing Geographic Data" on page 113 "Saving Geographic Data" on page 116. You can export most geo data objects (for example. Atoll supports a wide range of file formats for geographic data files. roads. can be used to give more realistic calculations. When you import a geo data file into Atoll. or modify existing data.1 Geographic Data Types An Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document: • Geographic data used in propagation calculation: • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Images from web map services (WMS) Contours. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab. The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations. and points representing. Lines. or by importing them directly to the Data tab. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). or regions. create new geographic data. DTM. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Geographic Data Types" on page 95 "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96 "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96 "Clutter Classes" on page 103 "Clutter Heights" on page 106 "Digital Terrain Models" on page 103 "Contours. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add contours. clutter heights. the following data types are described: • • • • • • "Digital Terrain Model" on page 95 "Clutter Classes" on page 95 "Clutter Heights" on page 96 "Contours. Some data types. or vector layers) for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 95 . raster polygons. lines. You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files.

GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. DXF. BIL (1 to 24-bit). As explained in "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 96). in a clutter height file. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). BMP (16-bit). BIL (8-bit). IST (16-bit). IST (8-bit). or points. Lines. Planet. discrete values. GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit). SHP. When you import a new geo data file. DFX. it is possible to have different heights within a single clutter class. temperature. SHP. Clutter height maps can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because. and TAB. You can 96 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit). The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map. IST (8 or 16-bit). see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. Planet. JPEG 2000 (1 to 24-bit). lines. Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model. and refractivity. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. vapour density. Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD. BIL (8 or 16-bit). Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system. • • 3. For information on defining the height per clutter class. BMP (8-bit). Planet. Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit). BIL (16-bit). MIF. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). and TAB.Atoll User Manual Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. and TAB. Contours. JPEG 2000 (16-bit). Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. BMP (1 to 24-bit). DXF. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. MIF. 3. SHP. Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit).. and points to represent polygons such as regions. When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map. clutter altitude is taken from the clutter height map. Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD. Planet. BMP (8-bit). Traffic data maps are used for network capacity analyses. Planet. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. and Points Atoll supports contours. MIF. Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. AGD. road maps or satellite images. Contours can also be used to create filtering polygons or computation or focus zones. You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value. MIF. and ECW (8 or 24-bit) JPEG 2000 (16-bit). JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). however. GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit). SHP. BIL (8 or 16-bit). BMP (8-bit). They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used only for display. IST (1 to 24-bit). or lines such as roads or coastlines. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. they have no effect on calculations. Planet.2 Supported Geographic Data Formats Atoll supports the following geographic data formats: • • • • • • DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit). Erdas Imagine (16-bit). and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). Traffic Data Maps Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. IST (8 or 16-bit). JPEG 2000 (8-bit). Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). and Erdas Imagine (8-bit) Vector data files in the following formats: AGD. for example. Planet. GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit). and TAB.3 Importing Geo Data Files You can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. DFX.

You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files. Click OK. enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentages must equal 100. Under Mobilities (%). go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98. Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears. or only in the Uplink. b. e. The total percentages must equal 100. Under Clutter Distribution.64). enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. By default.3. c. This section explains the following: • • • • • • "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97 "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98 "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 99 "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 101 "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 102 "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. 3. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list. For information on embedding files. see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112. The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself. Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. providing that the geo data files are of the same type. Under Services (%). Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. For UMTS and CDMA. d. enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentages must equal 100. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. Click Import. 2. Click Open. Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. When you import a traffic data map. 3. select the Embed in Document check box. For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using user configuration files. f. only in the Downlink. choose one of the following options: DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 97 . You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. Select File > Import. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. Select the geo data file you want to import. select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). Under Terminals (%). The Open dialogue appears. the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears: a. Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list. To import a geographic data file in a raster format: 1. 5. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. 4.

The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file.67). You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. Select Geo from the Import to list. The Open dialogue appears. or number of inhabitants per kilometre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3. and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population density or to a number of inhabitants.65: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²) Figure 3. providing that the geo data files are of the same type.Atoll User Manual Figure 3.65 and Figure 3. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file.66). pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. Click Open. Select Population from the Import to list.66: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point) 98 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that you are importing. 2. go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97. Note: If the File Import dialogue appears. Select File > Import. Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons.3. Figure 3. Under Fields to be imported.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File When you import geo data files in vector format. iii. To import a vector-format geographic data file: 1. Population: ii.64: Importing a clutter class file 3. 3. their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atoll document. choose one of the following options: Vector Data: i. Select the geo data file you want to import.

To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data: 1. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. Under Fields to be imported. when you import a vector file. you can import each type of geo data separately. The Open dialogue appears.3. defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files. Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data MSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Geoclimatic File: i. The index file is in ASCII text format and contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file. For information on embedding files. Click Import. 3. by importing several index files.3. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. or you can import several MSI Planet® geo data files at the same time. Select File > Import. and Atoll. Rectangles are interpreted as polygons. You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files. Figure 3. When you import MSI Planet® geo data. This way. such as a DTM or clutter heights. by importing the corresponding index file. select the Embed in Document check box. please refer to the Administrator Manual. For more information about defining the mapping between coordinate systems. 4. ii. 5. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from the second list. This section explains the following: • • "Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 99 "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 100. Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. By default. 3.67: Vector Import dialogue Notes: • • You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB).68).3. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3. you import the index file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 99 .

select the Embed check box.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database You can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files. The data is imported into the current Atoll document. click OK. 100 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select File > Import. click . The Open dialogue appears.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. The Open dialogue appears. c. 4. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open.3.3. 2. Select the corresponding check box b.69: Importing an MSI Planet® database 3. To locate the MSI Planet® index file. d. 4.69). For each type of data that you want to import: a. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import. If you want to embed the data. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in the current Atoll document. 3. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document. To import the MSI Planet® geo database: 1. Figure 3. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue.68: Importing an MSI Planet® index file 3.

such as roads. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. For information on defining these entries. 9. you can modify this name. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. To import a geographic data file from a web map service: 1. the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported. you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the same projection system supported by the server. Select either the image you want to import. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document. a group preceded by an Expand button ( ). select Connection to a Web Map Services server.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File You can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. Select File > Import. From the Files of Type list.70: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue 5. The Web Map Import dialogue appears. 2. The image will be referenced in the document. it can not be embedded. navigate to the item you want to import by clicking the Expand button ( ) to open each level. Before importing an image from a WMS server. you can arrange them by placing on top the image that is the most important. 4. Note: You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by selecting it in the right pane and clicking . Before you import them. 11. you can place the least transparent image towards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible. Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom.e. 3. Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information available along with a description of the service (Figure 3. i.3. 8.ini file. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. If desired. The images will be imported as a single object and their appearance will depend on the order you define here. see the Administrator Manual. Or. The following information is given about the imported WMS data: Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. 10. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as that used by the Atoll document itself. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system (for example. Click the Connect button. Click Import.. Note: The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll. The image must be in TIF format. 6. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly. The Open dialogue appears. Figure 3. You can not embed a WMS image in your document. 7.70 on page 101). The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue appears. Click for each image you want to import. or the image group. Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 101 .

Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file. such as clutter classes. 3. these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. Select File > Import. Click Import. 3. their own individual display settings. 3. If. For information. Atoll creates a link to the file. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. To create a new geo data folder when importing: 1. they appear directly on the Geo tab. you can select New folder in Data. see the Administrator Manual. The New Folder dialogue appears.3. Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab. the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import. 3. Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo. To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing: • Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box. lines. 4. select New folder in Geo. Click OK. You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File By default. lines. Atoll cannot find the file and displays the error message shown in Figure 3. You can not modify this object. however. Select the geo data file and click Open. When you import the next geo data file. group scanned images and contours. They retain. you can import it directly into the new folder. Important: If you are using distributed calculations. when you import a geo data file. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document. the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. When the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. Atoll imports the group as a single object. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document. 4. 5. 3. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file. Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. the geo data file is moved. either raster or vector.3. To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document: 1. either when you import it or later. The Open dialogue appears. 5. however.Atoll User Manual If you had selected more than one image or an image group. Click Embed. are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. and points into folders as well. Other data files. 2.64). and points.6 Embedding Geographic Data By default.3. If the file to be imported is a vector file. You can.71. or vice versa. 2. For more information. it is saved as part of the document. 6. you must link your geo data files. 102 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders By default. see the Administrator Manual. Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. You can. Once grouped. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue). however. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. the link will be broken. Select Properties from the context menu. however. choose to embed the geo data file in your Atoll document. when you import scanned images and contours. the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. If the file to be imported is a raster file. Atoll creates a link to the file. when you import a geo data file.67). Your file is imported into the newly created folder. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the import process again.

or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover.4 Digital Terrain Models The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level. When it finds a possible match. To manage the properties of the DTM: 1. select it and click OK. 3. and type. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. or DTM folder. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file. Select Properties from the context menu.71: Missing shortcut To find the file yourself: • When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3. 6. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 103 .71) appears. The context menu appears. Move the Relief slider towards Flat. Figure 3. For information on clutter height maps. 3. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document: 1. see "Clutter Heights" on page 106. if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to emphasise the differences in altitude. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder. click folder. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. to expand the 2. 4. based on size. 5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Traffic. If the geo data file is in a folder.72: Problem with shortcut You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document. Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. click the Find button. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair.5 Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. such as the Clutter Classes. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM. For information on Display tab settings. 2. 5. date. 3. click the Browse button to locate the geo data file. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue.72). A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. Select Properties from the context menu. If the file corresponds to the source file: • Click Yes.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well. Browse to the geo data file. 4. It searches for the nearest match. it informs you with a message (see Figure 3. however this height is only an average per class.

4.Atoll User Manual This section explains the following: • • • • • "Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 104 "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104 "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 105 "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 105 "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 105. Select Properties from the context menu. and Monte Carlo simulations. 6. TD-SCDMA Note: - 7. and TD-SCDMA documents.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. Indoor penetration losses depend on the clutter types as well as the operating frequency. see the descriptions in the previous step. 5. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corresponding names. contact support. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue: To define clutter class properties: 1. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. To make it easier to work with clutter classes. Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions. 4. 8. or IMP format. Important: If the Height field is left blank. When you import a clutter class file in BIL. TIF. 3. point analysis. Click the Default Values tab. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file. you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document: For all Atoll documents: Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss. Select Properties from the context menu. Enter default values for each field. 3.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver location. This is an optional feature that must first be activated. When a clutter class has a descriptive name. 5. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. If desired. In addition to the Display tab options described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.5. 2. 104 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To assign names to clutter classes: 1. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. You can define an additional indoor loss per frequency band used in the Frequency bands table in GSM GPRS EGPRS. it is the name that appears in tool tips and reports. 3. 3. Even if there is a clutter classes map. JPEG 2000. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. each clutter class display type has a visibility check box. 2. you can assign a descriptive name to each clutter class name. see the Technical Reference Guide.5. Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code. CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box. enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column. For more information. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. Atoll can automatically assign names to clutter classes if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. you can display or hide clutter class display types individually. propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map. you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. UMTS HSPA. In the Name column. as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. For information about each field.

To copy the description table. 3. You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map. Click Refresh. The Statistics dialogue appears. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Si % of I = ------------. For information on modifying the clutter class map. and step 6. 2. enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code 6. 3. in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and.5. In the blank row marked with column. Atoll displays the surface area covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one. Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire document. 5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes Under certain circumstances. 3. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. Select Properties from the context menu. 2. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. 3. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK. if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted one of them. 100 Sk  k © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 105 . press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document. Click OK. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. 3.3 Adding a Clutter Class You can add a new clutter class to your document. 9. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent. Tip: You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file. For example. if there is no focus or computation zone. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. To refresh the list of the clutter classes: 1.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. To add a new clutter class to the your document: 1.5. 7. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current. if one exists. even if they are not used in the remaining file. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list. 2. it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. 4. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. To display the surface area covered by each clutter class: 1. 6.5. see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114. displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage (% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Select Statistics from the context menu. 3. at the bottom of the table. you can refresh the list. This information is also available in prediction reports. 4. Click OK. select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C.

The vector table appears. When you import a vector file. with. 106 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll can use additional information related to vectors as display parameters. roads. Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation models (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model). right-click the vector layer folder. a height is given for each point on the map. Lines. Right-click the vector layer. or computation or focus zones. 4. To open the vector layer table: 1. The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. In a clutter height file. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. for example.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. The context menu appears. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. When a clutter height file is available. the following are explained: • • • "Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 106 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 106 "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. Select Open Table from the context menu. and points. Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file. the height is given as an average per clutter class. 3. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes. for display (in tool tips and in the status line).6 Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. To manage the display of a vector layer: 1. In addition.7. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. In an Atoll document. and points are arranged in vector layers. For information on Display tab settings. lines. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. Vector Layer Table All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table. 3. vector objects such as contours. lines. To manage the properties of clutter heights: 1. but polygons can be used as filters. Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data. The Properties dialogue appears. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. 2. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights. In this section. and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu. For information on working with data tables. 4. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder.Atoll User Manual 3. and Points In Atoll. Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104). For information on using the display tab. 3. The context menu appears. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located. Select Properties from the context menu. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy because they allow more than one height per clutter class.7 Contours. If no clutter height file exists. 2. 3. The imported or created vectors are used primarily for display purposes. you can import or create vector objects such as contours. The Properties dialogue appears.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue.7. 5. The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the status bar.

8. Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer. such as transmitters. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. XMAX: The end X coordinate. You can rename the vector layer using this field. with its path relative to the current location of the index file. You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo tab from the context menu. Deleting. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. with the information separated by a space: • • • • File name: The name of the file. for example. The index file is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line. Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked. Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document. calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). - 4. 3. For more information about display priority in Atoll. 3.. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. For information on sorting. To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer: 1. 5. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. 3. all objects on the Data tab. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. For information on the Table tab. or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. right-click the vector layer folder. You may wish. for example.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab In Atoll. For information on filtering. Click the Table tab. to ensure that certain geo data. as specified when the file was imported.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit. the coordinate system used is the file’s. The context menu appears. the following are explained: • • "Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 107 "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 108. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab. Each line contains the following information. see "Adding. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer.7. XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96. and a Display tab. road maps or satellite images. major geographical features. In this section.1 Importing Several Scanned Images You can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time. roads. 2. Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. 3. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. however. and predictions. To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window: 1. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. a Table tab. The following options are available: Name: The name of the vector layer. etc. The context menu appears. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. 2. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. Select Properties from the context menu. YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file. remain visible in the map window. 3.They have no effect on calculations. Click the Display tab. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps. When the a vector layer is embedded. antennas. and Records menus. the coordinate system used is document’s. otherwise the file is described as embedded. Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document. Click the General tab. as specified when the file was embedded. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 107 . Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placing it above data such as predictions.8 Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. Vector Layer Properties Dialogue The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab. For more information on editing tables in Atoll. Format. For information on the Table tab.

Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image. Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white to be transparent. 5. Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text box.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images Because imported images cannot be modified. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Shades of gray. the scanned image is not displayed. 2. vapour density. Select the index file and click Open. 108 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. and refractivity. nice1.9 Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. 4.73). Select File > Import. or Watermark from the list. The context menu appears.Atoll User Manual • • YMAX: The end Y coordinate.73: Scanned image Properties dialogue 3. allowing objects in lower layers to be visible. Figure 3. calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). To define the display properties of a scanned image: 1. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range. temperature. Right-click the scanned image. 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window 2. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0 File name To import an index 1. XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0 3.8. Click Import. In this section. Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2. they have fewer display parameters than other object types.64). The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select the Display tab and set the following options: Colour: Select either Automatic. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK. the following are explained: • • "Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 109 "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 109. 4. 0: The zero character ends the sequence.

10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data Atoll lists the imported DTM. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Select Properties from the context menu.10. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. The following tabs are available: Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the geoclimatic map. Data on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects on the top layer. see "Adding. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.9. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. 7. For information on working with the Table tab. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. Thus.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column. 2. If the check box is selected ( ). with the relevant data selected in the Field column. such as transmitters. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column. If the check box. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. 3. For information on using the display tab. antennas. • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 109 . Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. if there is no focus or computation zone.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. For more information. there are as many layers as imported objects. It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab. not all objects in the folder are displayed. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one. the object is displayed.9. Select Statistics from the context menu. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) of a geoclimatic map. the object is not displayed. for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. - 5. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab. The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. Click to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 3. To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data: 1. 3. Value interval is the only available display type.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties To manage the properties of a geoclimatic map: 1. Click the Table tab. 2. clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data file and scanned image. 3. if the check box is cleared ( ). Deleting. Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. 3. Each object is placed on a separate layer. 6. is selected but shaded ( ). are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. and predictions. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data: • The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether or not the object is displayed on the map.

for example. In this way. etc. • • The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects. you should place the objects with the best data at the top. it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. Therefore for each folder. 110 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . for example. MAJORROADS. such as predictions.Atoll User Manual Note: All objects on the Data tab. antennas.74.74: Displaying Geo data layers 3. For more information. what is used is what is seen. roads. you can ensure that certain vector geo data. Object folders. RIVERLAKE. Vector geo data. however. DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. remain visible in the map window For more information. Figure 3. An object is visible only in the map window if the scale. both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of calculation priority. is within this range. For example. are not visible. where the density of users is higher. clutter classes.10. Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter class file with the higher resolution. using the second file for all other calculations. such as clutter classes. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes.. In this case. and traffic density folders. etc.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23. For more information. Population maps and custom geo data maps. and some object types. the DTM. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different resolutions. When you make calculations in Atoll. and for custom geo data maps. so that the object is not displayed on the map. can contain more than one data object. Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ). see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. MAJORSTREETS. where they can be placed over data such as predictions. you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core. the linear objects (ROADS. Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ). major geographical features. and predictions. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display. RIVERLAKE. such as transmitters. In other words.) is the data from the top down. and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. by placing the clutter class file for the downtown core over the file with the lower resolution. can be transferred to the Data tab. RAILWAYS and AIRPORT). as displayed on the zoom toolbar. DTM. On the other hand. The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher levels. clutter classes. clutter heights. COASTLINE. vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS. In Figure 3. when calculating coverage in an urban area. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports. These are normally the objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. etc. the DTM layer which is beneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer. In the map window. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23.

In Case 2. in both Case 1 and Case 2. Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window.76: Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area 3. the DTM map is on top of the clutter class map. Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. Explorer window Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter DTM • DTM Case 2 DTM • DTM Clutter classes • Clutter Work space Figure 3.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas In this example.10. Atoll will therefore use the data in "Clutter 2" where it is available.2.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area In this example.2.” A DTM map called “DTM”. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1" In the case of two clutter class maps. Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. there are two imported clutter classes maps: • • "Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m. “DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m. and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 111 .2.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area In this example. In Case 1. "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m.10.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll: • • • "Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 111 "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 111 "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 111. the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map. Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account.75: Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas 3. Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window to decide which data to use. Explorer window Case 1 DTM • • Work space DTM 2 (20m) DTM 1 (50m) Case 2 DTM • • DTM 1 (50m) DTM 2 (20m) Figure 3.10. In Case 1. there are two imported maps: • • A clutter class map called “Clutter. 3. In this example. "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1". there are two imported DTM files: • • "DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m. the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap. In both Case 1 and Case 2.

default standard deviations. working on a similar Atoll document. you can save much of this information in a user configuration file. In this section. you export: • • • • the paths of imported geographic maps map display settings (visibility scale. height. another user.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is saved into an external file. The surface area is only given for closed polygons. standard deviations.77: Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area 3." In Case 2. and indoor loss) raster or user profile traffic map description. etc. Atoll will only use the data from "Clutter 1. transparency." Explorer window Work space Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (20m) • Clutter 1 (50m) Case 2 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (50m) • Clutter 1 (20m) Figure 3. To display information about the geo data in a tool tip: • Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. name. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .12." Therefore. Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( selected. "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2.Atoll User Manual "Clutter 2.) clutter description (code. see the Administrator Manual. once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters. When you export the geographic data set. For information. orthogonality factor. Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well.12 Geographic Data Sets In Atoll. percentage pilot finger of each clutter class. can import the configuration file containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters. tips text. indoor loss. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 112 "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 113. For information on how to display information in tooltips. 3. ) on the toolbar has been 3. Then.

the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is imported into your current Atoll document. SHP. 2. To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set: 1. 3. If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data. 5. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any imported data. 6.78: The User Configuration dialogue 3. 3. Erdas Imagine (16-bit).Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data To export a geo data set in a user configuration file: 1. lines.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable. browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name.. or TAB format) (for more information. select the Delete existing geo data check box. When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set. In the Save As dialogue. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Geoclimatic maps (for more information. adding a vector layer to the Population folder and then adding polygons. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. Atoll checks if there are already geographic data in the current Atoll document. select the check boxes of the items you want to import. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <. 4. "Editing Polygons.13 Editing Geographic Data In Atoll. you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by.2 Importing a Geo Data Set When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set. Lines. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 113 . Click OK. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115). If so. clear the Delete existing geo data check box. 5. "Editing Clutter Class Maps" on page 114) Contours. In the User Configuration dialogue. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Traffic data maps Custom data maps (for more information. select it and click Open.12. The Open dialogue appears. 2.e. for example.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file. and Points" on page 34) Population maps (if they are in vector format. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3. select the Geographic Data Set check box. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. the option Delete existing geo data appears with other options in the User Configuration dialogue. Note: You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll. MIF. In the User Configuration dialogue. 4. The User Configuration dialogue appears. AGD. The following types of geographic data can be edited: • • • • • • Clutter classes (for more information.78). and points (for more information. The Save As dialogue appears. Figure 3. Browse to the user configuration file. Click OK. DXF. i. Click OK. 3.

4. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon.1. ii. ii. Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue. "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 115 3. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point.79). Adding a point: i.13. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. The pointer changes ( ). To edit clutter polygons: 1. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. a polygon deletion tool .2 Editing Clutter Polygons You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points. From the list. 3. 3.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. 6. Figure 3. 3. Drag the point to its new position. Click the polygon drawing button ( ). a polygon drawing tool . Select Edit from the context menu. Select the polygon. You can later edit and export the polygons you have created. 8. ii. select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list. A point is added to the border at the position of the pointer. Select Edit from the context menu. 7. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons. The context menu appears. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Deleting a point: i. 2. Double-click to close the polygon. Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. 2. 114 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken into account by propagation model calculations.Atoll User Manual 3. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The pointer changes to a pencil ( ). To create a polygon: 1.1. 5.79).13. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete.79: Editor toolbar 4. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. The pointer changes ( ). The pointer changes ( ). In this section. and a Close button (see Figure 3. You can now edit the clutter polygon by: Moving a point: i.13. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon In Atoll. The context menu appears. The point is deleted. the following are explained: • • • • "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114 "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 114 "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 115.

To create a vector layer and vector objects on a geo data map: 1.79). For information on renaming objects. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. The context menu appears. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. By renaming each vectors folder. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3.1. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). 3.79). ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: 6. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select Edit from the context menu. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. b. the Geoclimatic Parameters. To delete a clutter polygon: 1.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons You can delete clutter polygons. Select Edit from the context menu. Right-click the geo data object. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Double-click to close the contour. 4. Right-click the new polygon or rectangle and select Properties from the context menu. The context menu appears. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners.13. c. Right-click the the Geoclimatic Parameters. Right-click the new vector layer. Select Edit from the context menu.13. b. 8. 4. 3. 4.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area: 1. To draw a polygon. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon ( 11. 3. folder. The context menu appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 115 . Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. The pointer changes ( ). Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon. for example.1.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. ) or the New Rectangle ( ) button on the Vector Edition toolbar. The Properties dialogue appears with the coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps Some geographic data maps. and points) to this layer. The context menu appears. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. The polygon is deleted. you can ensure that you select the correct folder. click the New Rectangle button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: a. c. Click the polygon you want to delete. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected geo data object folder. 10. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. geoclimatic maps. lines. you must map the vector layer. 3. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. 5. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. 2. click the New Polygon button ( a. Enter a value: Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map. 2. 9. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. 7. are made up of individual vector objects. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. 5. folder. To draw a rectangle.13. to which you want to add a vector layer.

Click Save. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. "Rain" is selected by default. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. The Properties dialogue appears. you can save your modifications to an external file. or in a different raster format. Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab. When exporting in BIL format.14. 2. Lines. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the georeference information. When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file.Atoll User Manual 12. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the georeference information. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Select Save As from the context menu. To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file: 1. JPEG 2000: When you select the JPEG 2000 format. 13. TIF: When you select tagged image file format. the part containing the computation zone.1 Saving Modifications to an External File In Atoll. in the same format or in another one. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. In the Save As dialogue. The Save As dialogue appears. you can save these changes to the source file. You can edit the vector objects as explained in "Editing Polygons. 3. Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type in Atoll.14 Saving Geographic Data Atoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. This section explains the following: • • • • • "Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 116 "Updating the Source File" on page 117 "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 118 "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 118 "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 119 3. Select Properties from the context menu. TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export. either in the same format as used in the current Atoll document. For the following geo data: Geoclimatic Parameters: In the Field column. 3. you can save them as one file. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.1. and Points" on page 34. 4. enter a name for the file.80). Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file containing the georeference information. BIL: When you select the BIL format. 5.14. see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96). or just your modifications to the geo data. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the selected part as a new file. You can select from one of the following file formats: BMP: When you select bitmap format. 116 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Saving a geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to: • • • • • Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data. GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file. Click the Data Mapping tab. This section explains the following: • • "Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 116 "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117. you can export them to a new external file. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information. 3. and select the file format from the Save as type list. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save a file to an external file. exporting either the entire geo data or just your modifications allows you to save those modifications to an external file.

Select Save As from the context menu. no other clutter class geo data file.80: Export dialogue 6. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. You can embed the file afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). The selected data is saved in an external file. use either the AGD.14. The context menu appears. and points.2 Updating the Source File While working on an Atoll document. 3. 2. Click Save in the Save As dialogue. If the geo data file is linked. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the clutter classes. the suggested resolution is 100 m. Define a Resolution in Metres. If several objects have been modified. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file. the following maps can be exported as vector format files: • • • Vector-format population maps Vector-format geoclimatic maps Vector-format custom maps. the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified objects. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 117 . On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. 3. - 4.1. enter a name for the file. You can select from one of the following file formats: AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. In the Save As dialogue. The suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria: If one object has been modified. the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. 8. it cannot save vectors made of lines or points. you may make changes to geo data. If there is no initial clutter class object.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. Click OK. Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the current Atoll document. - - 7. or traffic objects. The Vector Export dialogue appears. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes geo data folder. 5. right-click the vector layer folder.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. whether or not the computation zone is visible. SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons. Once you save a vector layer. 3. The Save As dialogue appears. If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM. Click Export. MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. As a format created for Atoll. To export a vector layer: 1. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file. and select the file format from the Save as type list. Atoll can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats. the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. Under Region. lines. the MIF or the TAB format. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone.14. Atoll prompts you to save the changes when you close the document. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. displaying the current coordinate system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change. A vector layer can contain contours. Along with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab.

you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117). You can combine these separate files to create one single file. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Therefore. ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. 5. for example. 4. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 8. The files will be combined according to their order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The linked file is updated. Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. 7. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo data files. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. Click OK.Atoll User Manual To update the source file of a linked geo data file: 1. Select Save As from the context menu. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. 3.14. If the files overlap on the map. 5. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The context menu appears. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears. Under Region. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. or in a different application. select The Entire Project Area. 2. Select Save from the context menu. The suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects. If you do not want to replace the current file. Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file. 3. 3. Select Save As from the context menu.81).3 Combining Several Files into One File In certain circumstances. 3.14. You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps To combine individual files into a new file: 1. 6. the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 118 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The context menu appears. 3. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. you may have several geo data files of the same type. Click OK. If the geo data file is a vector file. The selected data is saved as a new file.81). 4. The Save As dialogue appears. the combined file will show the file on the top. after importing an MSI Planet® index file. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. When you export an embedded file. To export an embedded geo data file: 1. Define a Resolution in Metres. 2. 2.4 Exporting an Embedded File You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document. The context menu appears. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.

The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. For information on the Coordinate Systems dialogue.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. whether or not the computation zone is visible. 4. 3. Click OK. 2. To change the coordinate system used for the exported file. Figure 3. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. Select Save As from the context menu. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File You can create a new file from a section of a larger file. click Change. or in a new Atoll document. c. b. you must first define the area by creating a computation zone.81).82). Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. - b.81: The Vector Export dialogue a. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the Geo data tab. To create a new file. Under Region.82: Export dialogue a. Define a Resolution in Metres. 5. The context menu appears. Click Export. You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Population Geoclimatic maps To create a new file from a section of a larger file: 1. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document. The Save As dialogue appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 119 .14. The selected data is saved in an external file. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Click OK. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. If the geo data file is a raster file. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the geo data. 3. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.

7.Atoll User Manual 6. whether or not the computation zone is visible. 120 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The selected data is saved as a new file. Click OK. 8. Under Region. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. select The Computation Zone. Define a Resolution in Metres.

Chapter 4 Antennas and Equipment .

.

the equipment used to create a network is modelled. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. Select Antennas > New from the context menu. and antenna diameter.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4 Antennas and Equipment In Atoll. waveguides. and defined by the operating frequency band. the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment. Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when determining propagation. To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table: 1. vertical pattern. 4. and antennas are listed in the Manufacturers table. The context menu appears. Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas. 2. horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for horizontal and vertical polarization. each microwave antenna is identified by a name. 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. 2. along with the characteristics which have a bearing on network performance. gain.1 Creating an Antenna The microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves. This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as waveguides and cables: • • • • • "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 123 "Defining Antennas" on page 123 "Microwave Equipment" on page 127 "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 138. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Each of these patterns can have both co-polar and cross-polar patterns defined.. manufacturer name. Right-click the Links folder.e. Atoll enables you to create new antennas and set the parameters of each (i. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. In this section the following are described: • • • • "Creating an Antenna" on page 123 "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 125 "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 125 "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 126. name. To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Click the General tab.e. 5. 5. The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible antenna/equipment sets. Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized. You can enter information in the following fields: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 123 . you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor. 1. Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. and diameter). Comments: Any comments. 6. The context menu appears. As well. i. gain. 4.2 Defining Antennas In Atoll. 4. 3. The Manufacturers table appears. 4. horizontal and vertical antenna patterns. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears. manufacturer. Tip: To create an antenna: When you create a new antenna. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ): Name: The name of the manufacturer.1 Defining the List of Manufacturers In Atoll. 3.2. Right-click the Links folder. horizontal pattern..

Horizontal plane: - - Vertical polarisation . g.Horizontal plane: Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern. . for the vertical polarisation. Figure 4. Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern. displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical polarisations. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. If there are some blank rows in the data sheet. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. Click Apply to display the pattern. If some values are missing in the data sheet. for the horizontal polarisation. you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna: Horizontal polarisation . Atoll removes blank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button. Comments: Any additional information on the antenna. When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue. Copy the selected data. Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD). b. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with. Click OK. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna. c. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern. Paste the data in the table. 124 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 7. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values.Vertical plane: - - Vertical polarisation . On each of the four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. f. Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available. e. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Horizontal polarisation . - - 6. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane.83: Copying horizontal pattern values d.Vertical plane: - a. Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern around the antenna. Switch to Atoll.Atoll User Manual Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna.Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values. When you calculate along an angle for which no data is available.

4. Select Antennas > Import from the context menu. To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna: 1. 4. which gives:  Gain  dBi  + 2. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16. 5. Right-click the Links folder. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported in the Events viewer. see the Technical Reference Guide. In the Data Import dialogue. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 125 .Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4.2. The file or folders are imported. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. 6. Click Import. 2. The Data Import dialogue appears.89. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table. Editing a Single Radiation Pattern You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna.0501. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.11 – Log  Max Frequency – Min Frequency  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------  2 20 Diametre  m  = 10 For more information on antenna file formats. The context menu appears. 1. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. The MW Antennas table appears. Right-click the Links folder. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu. The context menu appears. Note: You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes.2 .99. Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs. 8. see the following web site: http://www. Click the Browse button ( 7.3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns In Atoll. see "Creating an Antenna" on page 123). 3. 4. 5. Atoll automatically calculates the antenna diameter from the antenna gain and average operating frequency.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. 3.050). The average operating frequency is calculated as (Maximum Frequency .fcc.003 and WG16. Right-click the antenna in the Antennas table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. 2. 8.2.html. The context menu appears.Minimum Frequency)/2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To import antenna files: 1. 6. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antenna and replace the antenna patterns of another antenna: • • "Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 125 "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 126. 7. The antenna diameter is calculated using the following equation for a radiation efficiency of 55 %: Gain  dBi  = 20  Log  Diametre  m   + 20   Frequency  MHz   – 42.99.2 Importing Microwave Antennas Atoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16.

Notes: • You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu.vertical plane 8. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to. select the cell with the pattern. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.horizontal plane V Polar. The context menu appears. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Antennas table you can assign the antenna patterns of one antenna to another. The Properties dialogue appears. 2. To open the MW Antennas table: 1. 3. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu.H Plane: Horizontal polarization .horizontal plane H Polar.4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns To print the pattern of a microwave antenna: 1. Right-click the Links folder.84: MW Antennas table 5. 126 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns in the MW Antennas table. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern.V Plane: Vertical polarization . In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy. 6. The MW Antennas table appears. Figure 4. you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them (see Figure 4.2.vertical plane V Polar. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. . Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table. Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell. select the cell with the pattern.84). 8. Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print: H Polar. . 4. By resizing row height and column width.H Plane: Vertical polarization . 7. 7. 5. . Right-click the Links folder. • Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. 6. 2. 4.V Plane: Horizontal polarization . The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. . You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu. The MW Antennas table appears. 4.

the higher the gain of the antenna. The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following: • Directivity: In practical terms. horn. flat or planar. as well as the equipment that constitute it. yagi.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 9. directivity is defined as: • • The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions. or array) to achieve its specific objectives. In general. is composed of three main sub-systems: • • • Indoor unit (IDU) Outdoor unit (ODU) Antenna Figure 4.3 Microwave Equipment Microwave radio equipment are the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can then be transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received to data. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 127 .85: Radio system components Indoor Unit (IDU) The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radiated in the opposite direction. It consists of the following components: • • The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU) Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriate radio band and channel for radio transmission. lens. Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. the higher the FBR. Antenna The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the air and receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. The microwave radio system. Using polarisation enables the same radio frequency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another. The antenna can be in one of many different shapes (for example. typically between 35 and 50 dB. The portion of the pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of the wave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu. parabolic. 4. • • Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminals of the antenna.

The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. Max ATPC also enables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links. The system configuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standby channels. In this section. 4. 2. - Specify the System Configuration (i. You can create a new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment table. modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna. the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment. Select Equipment > New from the context menu. If a hot standby system is available.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll In Atoll.3. On the General tab of Properties dialogue. and then define its parameters using its Properties dialogue. The Max ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations. Switching to the standby channel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. see "Defining Antennas" on page 123. The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain signal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. Microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power. For more information on antennas. 3. Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use. you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. set the following parameters: Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment. It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from the undesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation discrimination factor (XPD). XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB. the standby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels. 128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below: 4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below: - Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure. power control. Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF). The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogue appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. the 128 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For cold standby systems. the equipment protection configuration). Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.86: Polarisation • Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation to the power received in undesired polarisation. Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. 4. the system is called a "cold" standby system. If the system must be manually switched to the standby channel.e. The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC (cross-polarized interference canceller) is present. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of the antenna pattern.Atoll User Manual Vertical polarisation Horizontal polarisation Figure 4. 5. Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list. the following are explained: • • • "Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 128 "Importing Microwave Equipment" on page 132 "Advanced Configuration" on page 132. For a hot standby system.. To create a piece of microwave equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

prediction from laboratory simulations. - Under Rate. Rummler.D.W. 1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i. W. Lundgren and W. 1727-1732. Frequencies allocated to active and standby channels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue. choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) due to multipath fading. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue. pp. set the following parameters: Under Digital Hierarchy. Lundgren and W. "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. The Kn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used. Rummler2 and the ITU P. Note: The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment. the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list. but only the main equipment is active. both the main and standby equipment are on. 1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. is not turned on. which will serve as a back-up in case the main equipment fails.observation vs..4 5. select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH). pp. 1073-1100.W. For more information. This information is available from the manufacturer. 6. see studies by C. May-June 1979.e. select Rummler model. The other equipment.87: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times Normalised: For a normalised signature.D. Figure 4. 2. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails. Under Radio Signature.D.5 7 1 Kn values (without adaptive equalization) Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times." Bell System Technical Journal. and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases..530 recommendation. 1988.e. Modulation 64-QAM 16-QAM 8-PSK 4-PSK Kn 15. select the Capacity (i. "Digital radio outage due to selective fading. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 129 . C." IEEE Globecom Proceedings. Rummler. only the main equipment is active and on. produce acceptable errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading.

and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue. and define the losses on Transmission and Reception. You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the manufacturer in the From manufacturer text box. set the following parameters: Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (Reception Filter): - For each circulator present on this piece of equipment.. as well as the quality required for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes. select Calculated C/I min. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue.: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I. set the following parameters: Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM). and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. 9. It is used to calculate the margin against enhancements.: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I. Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E). Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay. define the Overflow Threshold. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue. set the Port it is attached to. - - - User-defined C/I min. Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD). select User-defined C/I min. define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs. 8.. The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment and corresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. This will be used to calculate the thermal fade margin.Atoll User Manual The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks: The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy and Rate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximum amount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. Atoll will calculates the required quality based on the user-defined interference margin. The MTBF is available from the equipment manufacturer. you can define how the MXPD is calculated: Calculated C/I min. The overflow threshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation. The Hot Standby - 130 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . set the following parameters: Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). Enter the receiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER). 7.

The T/I graph defines the graph of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitter and victim receivers. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. 11. The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogue appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 131 . define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. On the T⁄I Graph tab of Properties dialogue. 4. 13. The Equipment table appears. The resulting T⁄I graph is displayed in the graph window on the right. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. 6. It is provided by the manufacturer. The context menu appears. 12. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue. 2. To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment: 1. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. when you define the properties for a link. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. Right-click the Links folder. 5. to let Atoll create the graph from standard values.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Properties dialogue. define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) graph either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. you must indicate which channel will be used as a backup in case of main equipment failure. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. For each interfering transmitter. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue. You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. For more information on defining link properties. This is done instead of calculating C/I values and comparing them to the published objectives. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section. The context menu appears. The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines the vulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). the received power level in dB is compared to the maximum power level to determine whether the interference is acceptable. Select Record Properties from the context menu.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). 7. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. 3. 10. Furthermore. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.

Note: If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table. 5. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported.3 Advanced Configuration Atoll offers several advanced configuration options: • • • "Digital Hierarchies" on page 132 "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 133 "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is a parameter of microwave equipment. Due to the synchronous nature of the SDH. Notes: Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs. it can take a long time. The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. In the Data Import dialogue. In Atoll.3. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equipment.3. the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same. Creating a Microwave Trunk Type Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available. Click Import. However. The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio. but the basic principles of multiplexing are the same. see the Technical Reference Guide. but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters. 4. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequency but are not synchronised with each other.3. 2. 3. The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates. NSMA-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension NSM.2 Importing Microwave Equipment Atoll enables you to import equipment files that are in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) format defined by the recommendation WG 21. The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transport digital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.051 or in Pathloss format (version 4. the T/I graph defined for identical modulations is imported into the T/I Graph tab while the others are imported into the theoretical graphs table. Each equipment file can contain several T/I graphs for different pairs of modulations. 6.Atoll User Manual 4. 4. Right-click the Links folder. the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streams do not coincide. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. To import equipment files: 1.0). For more information on the theoretical graphs.99. if you have the data available in tabular format. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu.1 Digital Hierarchies Atoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies. digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. Click the Browse button ( 7. The frame formats and thus the data rates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature. 8. a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate. For example. 132 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Pathloss-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension RAF.3. The Data Import dialogue appears. in other words. The file or folders are imported. 4. In this case. The context menu appears. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. For further information about the NSMA and Pathloss file formats.

89: Trunk type Properties dialogue 4. To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue: • Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu.530-8 recommendation. the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH.. Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i..e.2 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 133 . Right-click on the Links folder.3. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. add the following data: Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment To create a microwave trunk type: 1.e. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Figure 4. For each trunk type you define. If the check box is not selected ( ). You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).3. the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET.88). the useful bits plus the overheads bits). the rate of the useful bits not including the overheads bits).88: Trunk Types table 5. 4.89). BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2. Figure 4. No. 2. The trunk type’s Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. The context menu appears. Table 2) of the ITU-R P.

or the theoretical graphs if not. Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. capacity and modulation. If so. 2. If so. Right-click on the Links folder. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.90). the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 134 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 135. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment. In this section. Figure 4. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. 4. Figure 4. 6.91). These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. 2. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. or modulation are not the same. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. If the equipment manufacturer. The context menu appears.90: IRF table 5. capacity. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Atoll uses it. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136).91: IRF record Properties dialogue 134 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Otherwise. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer.Atoll User Manual The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available.

7. 8. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. The context menu appears. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 135 . Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Right-click on the Links folder. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. delete an IRF graph.92: IRF Setting dialogue 5.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. You can now define an IRF graph. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. 2. Click OK. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. 9. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. 4. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid.90). 6. Figure 4.

2. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid.dk. the receiver mask. These theoretical graphs can describe either the transmitter mask. Under Transmitter Filter. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears. The context menu appears. when information about the transmitter mask. 136 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or a T/I graph. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: Name: The name of the theoretical graph. 5. or the receiver mask. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment.gov.3. 9. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. The Theoretical Graphs table appears. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. Select Add Record from the context menu. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. c. rate. or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer. Default theoretical graphs are available for different frequency bands and bandwidths. Select Delete from the context menu. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. f. g. 6.. b. Click OK. 4. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Click OK. The context menu appears. the T/I graph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask. 4.Atoll User Manual To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. 7. b. d. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. bandwidth. the receiver mask. Under Enter graph values. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid. The context menu appears. To create a theoretical graph: 1. Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. 3. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. It can be either a transmitter mask. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. Under Reception Filter. A dialogue appears. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a.3 Theoretical Graphs Atoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i. T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://www. or T/I graph is missing). or a receiver mask. frequency band. e. The context menu appears.uk and transmitter and receiver masks have been found at http:\\www. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). and modulation. Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid.e. 3.3 Creating Theoretical Graphs A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/I. b. Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define.3. d. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference. c. Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid.ero.radio. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph.

Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu. called the cut-off frequency. on the other hand. Cables. the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).93: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor. Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined. 4.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment to the microwave antenna. called a waveguide. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph. and therefore there is no radiation loss. define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Click OK. define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).93). The electric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. 4. it can take a long time. If the graph describes the transmitter mask. with very low attenuation. Hence. These are quite robust and therefore easy to install. 3. the dielectric losses are also negligible. the lower the loss. 4. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies. Right-click the Links folder. The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. The dielectric material is usually air or foam. For information on the MWGuides table. the thicker the cable. If the graph is a T/I graph. The context menu appears. Cable loss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area. However. define the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.4. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To create a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube. microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length. The MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission and reception. 9. Note: If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data. The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll: • • "Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. Figure 4. For the new waveguide or cable. Since the dielectric is air. ) opens the Prop- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 137 .1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables In Atoll. The waveguide is designed for a specific wavelength. If the graph describes the receiver mask. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. if you have the data available in tabular format.

and waveguides. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. In this section. the following are explained: • • "Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 138 "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 139. Right-click the Links folder. equipment.5.1 Defining Compatibility Manually In Atoll. Circular. You can select from Cable. Click OK.e. 5. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Elliptic.Atoll User Manual Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table. You can define compatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or you can use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility. The context menu appears. Select Record Properties from the context menu.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. equipment.5. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. 2. 3. The context menu appears. The record’s Properties dialogue appears.1. Other.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable In Atoll. 4. The defined compatible antenna/ equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link. and waveguides as options in lists. Elliptic. the following are explained: • • "Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 138 "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 139 4. 6. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Circular. In this section. The Waveguides and Cables table appears. 4.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. and waveguides) of a microwave link. 6. You can select from Cable. ) opens the Prop- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 7. you can modify the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable. or Rectangular. Right-click the Links folder. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. For the waveguide or cable. Other. 4. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. To modify a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table: 1. Click OK. you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. When you define the properties (i.4. these compatibility definitions can be used to display only compatible antennas. antennas. or Rectangular.. 138 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 4. 2. 8. equipment.

4.2. A dialogue appears. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. these compatibility definitions can be used in order to display only compatible antennas. The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). if desired. enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. enter a Comment by doubleclicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. equipment. In this section. 4. equipment. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. 5. The context menu appears. You can also. 4. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. by default. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. Select the Frequency Band from the list. When you define the properties (i. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides: 1. Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. Right-click the Links folder. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter.5. 2. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). Right-click on the Links folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table appears. and waveguides as options in lists. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. the following are explained: • • "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 139 "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 140. 5. 4. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table: 1. antennas. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs. a piece of equipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band.e. respectively. and waveguides) of a microwave link.5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 4. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. these are taken into account and.. You can also.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 139 . Clicking the Browse button ( turer. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. respectively. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. 3. if desired. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. The context menu appears. The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MWGuides table. 5.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility Atoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. The Antenna/Guides Compatibility table appears. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu.1. 2.5. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter.

Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list. Select the Frequency Band from the list. The context menu appears. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. A dialogue appears. The cell is no longer marked in green. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries.Atoll User Manual 8. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3.5. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide: a. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. 4. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennawaveguide pairs. 4. You can use the Fill (Up. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 140 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. b. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Right-click on the Links folder. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and waveguide are compatible. Select Add Record from the context menu. b. The context menu appears. Right. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment: 1. Select Delete from the context menu.2. Click OK. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: a. 9. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. The context menu appears. Down. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table.

If you have previously defined compatible antenna/ waveguide pairs. delete a defined compatible antennaequipment pair. d. Select Delete from the context menu. the waveguides compatible with the corresponding antenna are selected. To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair: a. b. Select Add Record from the context menu. In the properties dialogue. To define compatibility with an antenna. b. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 141 .Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. Select Add Record from the context menu. and waveguides: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. or define compatibility with an antenna. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. The properties dialogue opens. The cell is no longer marked in green. c. select the waveguides that you want to make compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. The context menu appears. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment. Down. Click OK. b. Click OK to close the properties dialogue. The context menu appears. under List of the Compatible Guides. e. 9. and waveguides: To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment: a. The context menu appears. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennaequipment pairs. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. You can use the Fill (Up. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. a piece of equipment. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment. these are taken into account and. Right. a piece of equipment. by default.

Atoll User Manual 142 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands .

Atoll User Manual 144 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

8 dB gain Horizontal and vertical Horizontal and vertical From 60 to 120 cm for a 34-40 dB gain Horizontal and vertical © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 145 .497-6 ITU-R F. Frequency sub-bands are standardised.385-7 ITU-R F.595-8 ITU-R F.1 Microwave Frequency Bands Microwave links operate within a high frequency range (2-58 GHz). Atoll enables you to define frequency bands and sub-bands. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 2 GHz 7 GHz 10 GHz 80 km 50 km 45 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 36 dB gain Up to 370 cm for a 46.386-6 ITU-R F. In this chapter.637-3 ITU-R F. The characteristics of microwave frequency bands are different depending on the frequency.1. the length of the microwave link decreases. The length of a microwave length is dependent upon the frequency: as the frequency increases. managing frequency bands and sub-bands is explained: • • • "Microwave Frequency Bands" on page 145 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands" on page 146 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands" on page 147.748-4 ITU-R F. 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz 13 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz 5.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band A long-haul frequency band operates within a range of 2 to 10 GHz and can cover a distance from 45 to 80 km.749-2 Usually the frequency bands can be divided into three types: • • • "Long-Haul Frequency Band" on page 145 "Medium-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146 "Short-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. breaking it into channels.747-0 ITU-R F. Each frequency band is in turn divided into a number of frequency sub-bands. The following table gives details of long-haul frequency bands. 5.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands When planning a microwave link network.636-3 ITU-R F. By defining frequency bands you can determine the operational limits of a microwave link network. Long-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. The default frequency bands supplied with Atoll are based on the F-series ITU-R recommendations: ITU-R Recommendation Frequency Band ITU-R F.

Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHza a.4-42. Select Frequencies > Frequency Bands from the context menu. ITU-compliant frequency bands.94). Short-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading as well as rain fading (for the lower frequencies in the band). To create or modify a frequency band: 1. there is atmospheric attenuation of 12 dB per km.Atoll User Manual 5.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands Microwave frequency bands are implemented in Atoll. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 1 dB per km.1 dB per km. At 55 GHz. 26 GHz.4 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-120 cm for a gain of 38-44 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-180 cm for a gain of 39-49 dB Horizontal and vertical At 18 GHz.3 Short-Haul Frequency Band A short-haul frequency band operates within a range of 23 to 58 GHz and can cover a distance up to 18 km. At 23 GHz. the frequency band experiences atmospheric attenuation of 0. 3. there is multipath fading as well. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. 18 km Rain and multipath fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading From 30 to 120 cm for a gain of 35.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band A medium-haul frequency band operates within a range of 11 to 20 GHz and can cover a distance from 20 to 40 km.1 dB per km. 146 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . By default. for rain of 20 mm per hour. 40 km 35 km 20 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Rain and multipath fading From 60 to 120 cm for a gain of 36. 5. d. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 23 GHza 26 GHz and 27 GHza 38 GHzb 55 GHzc 58 GHzd a. At 38 GHz. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. Medium-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. The following table gives details of short-haul frequency bands.1 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. 2.3 dB From 30 to 60 cm 30 cm for a gain of 39. for rain of 20 mm per hour. for rain of 20 mm per hour. There must be at least one frequency band that can be assigned to microwave links that are created.66 dB 15 cm 15 cm Horizontal and vertical 15 km 10 km A few kilometers A few kilometers Horizontal and vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical b. there is atmospheric attenuation of 5 dB per km.1. and 27 GHz. The Frequency Bands table appears (see Figure 5. Atoll includes several pre-defined. 5. c. The following table gives details of medium-haul frequency bands. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. At 23 GHz. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder.5-47. At 58 GHz. The context menu appears. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km.1. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. for rain of 20 mm per hour. for rain of 20 mm per hour as well as multipath fading.

3. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. To modify a frequency band. To create or modify a frequency sub-band: 1. The context menu appears.94: The Frequency Bands table 4. 5.95). Frequency (MHz): The maximum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. Figure 5. breaking it into channels. Frequency sub-bands are standardised. Atoll automatically generates a channelisation plan or channel-to-frequency map using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands. To create a frequency band.95: The Frequency Sub-Bands table © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 147 . Comments: Any comments. Min. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ): 5. ITU-compliant divisions can have more than one frequency sub-band defined for a single frequency band. A frequency sub-band has two half-bands. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and the other half-band in the other direction. The Frequency Sub-Bands table appears (see Figure 5. Select Frequencies > Frequency Sub-Bands from the context menu.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands Figure 5. Frequency (MHz): The minimum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). 2. You can define a channelisation plan for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band. Max. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands Frequency bands can be divided into a frequency sub-bands. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency band.

Atoll User Manual 4. To create a frequency sub-band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency sub-band. Frequency band: The name of the frequency band to which the sub-band belongs. Reference Frequency (MHz): The reference frequency (in MHz). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): The lower half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): The upper half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). First Channel: The first channel of the sub-band. Last Channel: The last channel of the sub-band. Step: The step between channels. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency sub-band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ):

5. To modify a frequency sub-band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3.1

Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band
You can find the information necessary to create a frequency sub-band in the appropriate ITU-R recommendation. In this example, the recommendation R F.747-0 (for 10 GHz) is used. On the first page of ITU-R F.747-0 (see Figure 5.96), you see that the recommendation is for Frequency Band 10 GHz.

Figure 5.96: First page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 On page 2, you see the information in Figure 5.97:

Figure 5.97: Second page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 The information on page 2 of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 gives you the following values: • • • Reference Frequency (MHz): 11 701 MHz (the reference frequency is the central frequency of the sub-band). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1204 MHz Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1113 MHz Important: Remember to include the negative sign ("-") when defining the lower and upper half-band shifts. • • • • Inter-Channel Space (MHz): 7 MHz (as indicated by "+ 7m") First Channel: 1 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Last Channel: 12 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Step: 1 (as indicated by "The 12 values of m from 1 to 12)

148

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6
Managing Calculations in Atoll

Atoll User Manual

150

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6

Managing Calculations in Atoll
Once you have created microwave links, you can make predictions to study how well your network functions: • • • "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151 "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154 "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 156.

6.1

Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects
The following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects: • Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.1.1

Working with the Microwave Propagation Model
The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculating attenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must be assigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.98: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters: K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.

Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

151

the clearance).833-4 recommendations. N0: Enter the value for N0. or 99. Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient. ITU-R P. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P. Figure 6. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations.Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration. 6. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction.e. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calculate the tropospheric scatter loss. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6. ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%.99).99% of the time. Under Vegetation. For information on clutter categories. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.99: Microwave Propagation Model Properties . which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. The maximum attenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation. 7. Clutter categories are taken into consideration when studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile. 90%.Atoll User Manual Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington ITU 452-11 Full Deygout K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction. It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation. The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for information only. Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes. see the Technical Reference Guide. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation. you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. 152 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area. Under Tropospheric Scatter..Click OK. A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6.1.2

Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model
The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physical characteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculating interference. Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.100: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under Reference attenuation not exceeded during the average year, you can set the following parameter: Required Time Percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the global attenuation is not exceeded.

Under Rec. ITU-R P452 version, you can set the following parameter: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the global attenuation (dB) between an interfering transmitter and an interfered (victim) receiver: ITU-R P.452-12 Simplified ITU-R P.452-8

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.101).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

153

Atoll User Manual

Figure 6.101: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6.2

Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives
In this section, the following are explained: • • "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154 "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 154.

6.2.1

Microwave Link Classes
Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performance objectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters and usage limitations to the selected microwave links. To create or modify a microwave link class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears. 4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class. Each link class has the following parameters: Name: The name of the link class Type: The type of link class (International or National) Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.) Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.

The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

6.2.2

Defining Performance Objectives
The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance events. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error

154

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave error performance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include: • • • ESR SESR BBER

These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections: • • • "Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 155 "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 155 "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 155.

Microwave Error Performance Events
Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events: • • • Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits. Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.

Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Microwave Error Performance Parameters
The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available (Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is in the available state. The parameters are: • • • Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parameters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
The performance objectives serve two main goals: • Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expected error performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design. Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipment and systems in an ISDN connection.

Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasible network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, although expressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.

6.2.2.1

Defining Quality Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the quality parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised quality objectives. To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

155

Atoll User Manual 3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective. To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the quality objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.2.2.2

Defining Availability Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class inAtoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour of the availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Note: The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.

Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised availability objectives. To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective. To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.3

Defining Calculation Parameters
In a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into: • • Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information on setting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting link parameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 159.

As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations: • • Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.3.1

Global Parameters
The global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for: • • • Quality and availability analysis Objective selection Interference calculation.

To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears.

156

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

you can define the following parameters: Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on. the channel with the lowest margin)..g. the value you enter will be used as the K factor for all links in link analyses. Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link. two links between the same two sites).Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 4. the parameters you define will be used for quality and availability analysis. you can define the following parameters: Max. you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2 that Atoll will use for all links. objective selection. Calculate BER2: Select Calculate BER2 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER2 value. Results that do not meet the threshold will not be displayed. - Under BER. always off or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation. On the General tab. 6. a median value for the K factor will be used for each link in link analyses. Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels. Atoll performs the link analysis for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i. Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering. you can define the following parameters: Min. and interference calculation. you can define the following options: Calculate BER1: Select Calculate BER1 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER1 value. Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area. Therefore.. select which channel should be displayed the results of a link analysis: All: If you select All. 5. Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering. or on both the uplink and downlink. Click the Models tab. links with two channels). Click the General tab. Under Results. or both. Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power control on the transmitted signal is to be considered. It also applies to parallel links. you can enter the percentage of the interfered bandwidth that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers. Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port. you can define the following parameters: K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses: Median value for each link: If you select this option. On the Models tab. Ignore interference between channels of a same link: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore interference generated by channels of the same link on each other. the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: quality and availability analysis. Click the Interference tab. Under Calculation Parameters. B >> A. Atoll performs the link analysis using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link. on the uplink or downlink. On the Interference tab. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 157 . No IRF graph is taken into account when the Co-channel Only option is selected.. a site will be considered as an interferer when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed 2. the parameters you define will be used for interference calculation. Same value for all links: If you select this option. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B. User-defined Percentage: If you select this option. parallel links are referred to as links sharing the same link extremities (e. This option is useful if you have links with 2+0 configuration (i. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold. Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find potentially interfering sites. - Note: - Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration. Interfered Bandwidth: Define which sites are to be considered as interferers.5 times the interfered bandwidth. Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none. Under Result filtering.e. you can define the following parameters: The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B.e. No Filter: There is no filter and all sites within the maximum distance are considered as interferers. Under Interferer Filtering. Atoll considers co-channel interference when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed the interfered bandwidth. In this context. if you keep the default value of 250%. You can choose from the following options: Co-channel Only: Only co-channel sites are considered as interferer sites. Under Calculation Parameters.

The following are the available types of ground: A: sea water (average salinity).Q.Atoll User Manual Under Availability. Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation. 530-5.821 or ITU-T G. ITU-R P. If you select Vigants-Barnett. K. Vegetation without leaves: Select the Vegetation without leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones without foliage. you can set further parameters under ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability. 530-8. Method.530-10. 527-3. Click the Objectives tab.826 recommendations or a customised objective). ITU-R P. Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER). K. 20°C B: wet ground C: fresh water.530. Reduction of XPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rain whereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only. Method. you can define the ratio between the different objectives considered in the global availability objective. ITU-R P. 20°C G: ice (fresh water) - 9.Q factor. define the exponent of the frequency. you can set the following parameters: Frequency Exponent: Under K. 7. Method: If you selected K. ITU-R P. The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T G.530-12. Click the Clutter Categories tab. 20°C D: medium dry ground E: very dry ground F: pure water.530-11.Q.530 recommendations under Method. 158 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Clicking the Browse button ( ) beside the Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion. Therefore.530-12. number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER. 530-10.530-8. the parameters you define will select objectives. 530-11 and 530-12) are available. 8. ITU-R P. On the Clutter Categories tab. 838-1 and 838-3) are available. ITU-R P.Q.Q.530-10. Vegetation with leaves: Select the Vegetation with leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones with foliage. or it can be random. This tab lists all clutter categories defined in Rec. On the Objectives tab. Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions. Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P. you can either enter the geoclimatic factor (K) value or use a simplified method or use a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K). or ITU-R P. Distance: Under K. ITU-R P. you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected. Under Availability Objectives Apportionment. the global availability objective consists of three partial objectives for which you can define a weight. Click OK. For each clutter category. If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P. - Under Quality. Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact on propagation).530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P. The type of ground is used to determine permittivity and conductivity values taken into account in reflection analysis. to equipment failure. you can define the following parameters: Reflective: Select the Reflective check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as relection areas. select the Ignore Signal Enhancements check box if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett. Six availability analysis methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations.1058-2 and their characteristics. Two attenuation models for rain (ITU recommendations. you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).530 recommendations. the parameters you define will be used to analyse reflection and calculate vegetation losses. Soil type: Select the type of ground as defined in Rec.530-5. These weights are taken into consideration when calculating the performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and the unavailability due to equipment failures. define the distance.530-11. you can set the following parameters: Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation. method based under Method. or ITU-R P. Under Performance Objectives Selection.

Click the Expand button ( 3. Connections.102). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. ) to expand the Links folder. Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the interfering signal. Reliability. the target values for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. rain intensity (exceeding 0. Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. Select Properties from the context menu. Geoclimatic. For an explanation of the options available on the General. see "Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management". The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General. and the Propagation tab.2. Defining calculation parameters is explained in the following sections: • • • "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159 "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163 "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 165. 6. and Display tabs. PL percentage. you assign the performance objectives to the link. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. 5. Reliability. Propagation. 2. water vapour density. and Display.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link You set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatic tab. temperature.01% of time). Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link. To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link: 1. including climatic factor. Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 6. • • • The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwave links or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics. 4.3. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. For information on creating a link class.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 6. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 159 . The Properties dialogue appears. Note: You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. Radio. Under ideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. earth curvature factor (k).3. The context menu appears. Radio. 6. this performance level is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with the equipment. Connections. Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic. The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculate the quality and availability of the microwave link. the Reliability tab.2 Link Parameters The link parameters which affect calculations are the following: • Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. and Propagation tabs and are described here. In practice.

Temperate and Dry. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. you can choose between Warm and Humid. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature 160 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To access all geoclimatic parameters independently of the methods you have selected. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions.102: Microwave link Properties dialogue . you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates.Geoclimatic tab 7. you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link: Current Methods: Under Current Methods. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. you can select the following climatic zones: Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as quality calculation method. On the Geoclimatic tab. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.Atoll User Manual Figure 6. click the Display All button under Current Methods.

Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you select whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water. ITU-R P. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate.530-8 calculation methods. the rainfall observed 99.01% of the average year based on Rec. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P. ITU-R P.530-5 or 530-8 methods. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. If you are using ITU-R P.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain".530-5.Q method. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. 530-5 or Rec. or "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water.530: Under ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. ITU-R P.453-9. -8: Under ITU-R P. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps.530-5. the propagation condition factor for the VigantsBarnett method. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. Finally. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". for the K. K. or based on Rec.Q. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. - - - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 161 .530: The parameters found under Rec. you can define K. is displayed. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. -8 and Vigants-Barnett.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll based on Rec.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.835-3 (and select a season).530-5.Q. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can choose between "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m.99% of the average year). you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. in other words.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. Rec. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file.. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. using a userdefined reference altitude. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season). ITU-R P. Method: Under K. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P. If you select User-defined under Multipath Occurence. ITU-R P. Under Geoclimatic Factor. you can define the PL factor. you can select the Terrain Type.530.839-3 (and select a season).01% of the average year (or. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. Under Refractivity. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Rainfall exceeded 0.1510-0. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file.530-5. ITU-R P.530-12.530-5 and ITU-R P. If you select Simplified Method. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). Method.835-3 (and select a season). Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. calculated using the set parameters.530-12: Under ITU-R P. -8. if you select Terrain-based Method.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec.836-3.Q. you can enter the C factor value. the k factor median value. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. you can define the K factor. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded). Rec. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. ITU-R P.

10. Atolldisplays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. 162 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment.Reliability tab 9. you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair). you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Atoll will interpolate to determine the corresponding sensitivity. you can select the link class. Each link class can have different performance objectives. Figure 6. Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate.104). Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. The MTTR is taken into account when calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channel system.103: Microwave link Properties dialogue . Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. Availability: Under Availability.Atoll User Manual 8. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. For information on creating a link class. you can define reliability-related parameters: Link Class: Under Link Class. Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 6. you assign the performance objectives to the link.103). Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 6. On the Reliability tab.

6.Propagation tab 11. The context menu appears.3. To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links: 1. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. - 12. for example. 2. 2. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same time by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. 3. you can define propagation-related parameters: Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. The Links Table appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. in a highly homogeneous network. In the Links Table. 4. 5. Click OK. Right-click the Links folder.104: Microwave link Properties dialogue. To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links: 1. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. If no propagation model is selected. Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. On the Propagation tab. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links.2. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: © Forsk 2010 Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 163 . Select Open Table from the context menu.

7. copy the values into the cells below the modified cell: 164 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Click the modified cell. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. Select Edit > Fill > Up.Atoll User Manual PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. copy the values into all cells above the modified cell: a. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. 8. b. c.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 6.

b.2. 2. Grouping Microwave Links To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping: 1. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. The context menu appears. sorting the microwave links according to their common attributes. Click the modified cell. From the Group By submenu. 9. 2. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. select the property by which you want to group the microwave links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. 3. in a network that spans a great distance. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by: Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 165) Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 166) Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 168) 3. Select Edit > Fill > Down. for example. Ensure that you chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculation parameters have in common. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll a. and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links in that group. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 165 . To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links: 1. You can set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. Right-click the Links folder. 6.3. The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property. c. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4.

Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. The context menu appears. 2. 7. b. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. The Links Table appears. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 166 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 5. Select Open Table from the context menu. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified.Atoll User Manual Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. In the Links Table. The context menu appears. 6. you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. 3. 4. Click the modified cell. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. The Links Table appears. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. 6. For information on using the dialogue that appears. Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters. 7. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 8. copy the values into all cells in the group above the modified cell: a. Select Open Table from the context menu. Sorting Microwave Links To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. 5.

c. d. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. b. Click the modified cell. copy the values into the cells in the group below the modified cell: a. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified microwave link. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 167 . Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Select Edit > Fill > Up. Select Edit > Fill > Down. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. 9. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. 10.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll c.

You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you want to copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified. Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed. or you can use a value these microwave links do not have. Select the value to filter on. press CTRL as you click the other values. Select Open Table from the context menu. Filtering Microwave Links To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1.105 on page 168). Figure 6. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 5. You can now modify these microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 6.106 on page 169). To select more than one value. 4. You can now filter on a value in the table. Right-click the Links folder. The Links Table appears. 3. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Links table(see Figure 6. 6. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu: Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed.105: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.Atoll User Manual The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. The context menu appears. 2. 220 MHz) 168 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. 220 MHz) Note: You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 169 . For more information on advanced filtering.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. 7.106: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63.

Atoll User Manual 170 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 7 Microwave Link Project Management .

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7

Microwave Link Project Management
The microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave link networks. Using Atoll's microwave links module, microwave link networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects. Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, defining the quality and availability targets. You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequency planning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks while taking future growth and enhancements into consideration. Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-tomultipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed. Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., that there be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should be paid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits allows you to view the line of sight, Fresnel zone clearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile. Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atoll fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled. Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is divided into two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window: • • The Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects. The Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the definitions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. Each link refers to at least two separate sites in the Sites folder.

7.1

Designing a Microwave Link Network
Figure 7.107 depicts the process of creating and planning a microwave link network. The steps involved in planning a microwave link network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.107. 1. Open an existing microwave link document or create a new one ( 1 ). You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. You can create a new Atoll document as explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

2. Configure the microwave link network by defining network parameters ( 2 ). You can define the equipment such as antennas, waveguides, and cables used in the network (see "Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment") You define and modify microwave frequency bands (see "Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Subbands").

3. Add sites and carry out basic evaluations of the candidate sites and locate more suitable locations for candidate sites ( 3 ). You can add sites or modify existing ones (see "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175). You can evaluate the location of existing sites (see "Site Survey Tools" on page 176) and search for new candidate sites (see "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184).

4. Create microwave links between sites ( 4 ). You can create a microwave link (see "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188) based on a link template. If necessary , you can modify the template on which new links are based (see "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190). If necessary, you can create repeaters along microwave links between sites. You can create multi-hop microwave links ("Creating Multi-hops" on page 208).

-

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

173

Atoll User Manual 5. Analyse the microwave network. You can analyse the path profile (see "Analysing the Path Profile" on page 193), adding passive repeaters if necessary (see "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201) ( 5 ). You can analyse the quality and reliability of the network (see "Analysing Microwave Link Reliability" on page 203) ( 6 ). You can study reflection along the microwave link profile (see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) ( 7 ). You can interference along the microwave link profile (see "Analysing Interference" on page 221) ( 8 ).

6. Plan link channels ( 9 ) "Planning Microwave Link Channels" on page 216.

Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve the optimum solution for the network. 7. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again.

Figure 7.107: Planning a microwave link network - workflow

7.2

Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites
As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point supporting one or more microwave links. Atoll enables you to verify the characteristics of each candidate in order to chose the best site. Additionally, Atoll has tools that allow you to search for new locations for sites. In this section, the following are explained: • • • "Creating Sites" on page 174 "Site Survey Tools" on page 176 "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184.

7.2.1

Creating Sites
When you create a microwave site, you create only the geographical point. The created site can then support one or more microwave links. In this section, the following are described: • • "Site Description" on page 175 "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175.

174

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7.2.1.1

Site Description
The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab (see Figure 7.108):

Figure 7.108: New Site dialogue Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site. Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want. Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can use this height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.). Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.

-

The Pylon tab:

7.2.1.2

Creating or Modifying a Site
You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 175, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.108 on page 175). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 175. 4. Click OK.

Tip:

If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

175

Atoll User Manual

7.2.2

Site Survey Tools
Atoll provides several tools to enable you to evaluate the line of sight around a site or between candidate sites. In this section, the following are explained. • • • • • "Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site" on page 176 "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176 "Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites" on page 179 "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180 "Displaying a 360° View Around One Site" on page 181

7.2.2.1

Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site
Atoll allows you to display the line-of-sight area around a site in the map window. To display the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears. 3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters: Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration. Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.

4. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and define the following: Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area: To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider. To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the palette that appears.

6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site. To delete the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.

7.2.2.2

Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites
In Atoll, you can analyse the line of sight (LOS) between candidate sites. The analysis can be done for one particular site if one extremity of the microwave link is already locked or for all sites. In the analysis, Atoll considers the selected site(s) and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. For information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. To calculate a LOS report for one particular site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 7.109).

176

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

Figure 7.109: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report 3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis. 6. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

9. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. a. Click Add. The Field Selection dialogue appears. b. In the Field Selection dialogue, select the fields that you want to display in the report. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. To select a field to be included in the report, select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

c. Click OK to return to the Table tab. 10. Click OK. Atoll displays the selected results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

177

Atoll User Manual The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance (m): The distance between the sites. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110). Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.

-

Figure 7.110: Line of sight clearance

Tip:

If you double-click one terrain section in the Line of Sight Report table, Atoll will automatically center it in the map and will display its profile in the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.

You can remove the line-of-sight sections by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu. To calculate a LOS report for all sites: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. 7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 8. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

9. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

178

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. Minimise the number of hops to reach the target: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of number of hops. Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 2. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 179 . see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. Select Routing from the context menu. Under Height . Distance: The distance between the sites. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. i. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. - 4.e. The routes can consist of several hops and have different lengths. Atoll can display the route with the least of hops or the shortest route. As well.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 10. b. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). the path containing the least of hops. 7. The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. a. Right-click the target site either on the map. Click the Table tab. 5. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link.Transmitter Side and Height . A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7. Click OK to return to the Table tab. i. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. In the analysis.2. The Field Selection dialogue appears. To find the best route between two sites: 1. define the following parameters: Source Site: The starting site.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites Atoll allows you to find all routes between two sites fulfilling line-of-sight criteria. Under Earth Curvature Factors. from top to bottom. Click OK. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.2. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. If you want. Maximum Number of Hops: The maximum number of hops allowed between starting and target sites.110). Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. 6. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. For information on the focus zone. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Atoll will use the computation zone. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. define the first k factor value. or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 7. To select a field to be included in the report. Atoll considers the selected sites and all sites located within the focus zone. Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. On the Routing Options tab. The context menu appears. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites.e. The result can be between -100 and 100%. In the Field Selection dialogue. To change the order of the fields. - You can remove the line-of-sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. c. select the fields that you want to display in the report. 3. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). the shortest path. Atolllists all sites in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone. 11. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. Click Add. Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. Minimise the total path length: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of distance. if no focus zone is defined.

The number of columns named "Node#" displayed in the Routing to Site table depends on the maximum number of hops defined in the Routing Options tab. Clearance: If you want.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites In Atoll. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. For each clutter class. see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176. You can modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. Note: You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following: - Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site. indicating it is selected. Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile.Atoll User Manual 8. indicating it is selected. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. Under Penetration Condition. The Routing to Site table contains the following information for each route. define the following parameters: a. Node1: The name of the source site selected in the Routing Options tab. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Atoll displays the results in the Routing to Site table. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class. Then. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties. The context menu appears. 3. When the frame appears around the site. you can check the terrain profile between two microwave sites. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. Click the Clutter tab. 2. Distance: The length of the route. Atoll will use the pylon height defined on each site. 4. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between both sites. click to create the second analysis point. To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites: 1. Node#: The name of sites been through by the route and the name of the target site. 10. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). Atoll displays terrain sections on the map between each site of routes (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).2. 6. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. 180 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). 7. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. When the frame appears around the site. By default. You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. In addition. 5. b. Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Move the pointer to another site on the map. Click OK.2. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. click to create the first analysis point. Move the pointer to the site on the map. Right-click the Terrain Section tab. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. 9.

The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.2. The value can vary between -100 and 100%. On the map. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. - 9. 2. Right-click the site either directly on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 2. 1. select "Visibility". You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. 2. Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters. 4.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map. 1. Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered. Displaying 360° view around a site helps you to determine if the site is a good candidate and if it is visible from the other sites. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid. and terrain height and clutter along the profile. Select the Display tab and define the following parameters: Under Display Type. 3. Atoll uses the site heights. If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176). Then. For information on changing display properties. Click OK. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu. To perform a 360° view at any site: 1. the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation. 2. proceed as follows: 1. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. select "Value Intervals. Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site You can display a 360° view around each site. 3.111): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 181 ." Under Field. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The context menu appears. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered.2. Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered. 8. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoid between both sites. Select Properties. you have the following parameters: Id: The terrain section reference number. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Select 360° View from the context menu. click the terrain section you want to analyse. you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/ penetration of the Fresnel zone. 7. On the map. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. its properties are based on the selected link template. right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design. Site1: The Site1 name. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Site2: The Site2 name. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder.

The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the direction (in °) on the horizontal axis. The Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens. Its distance from the studied site (in m). This representation helps you select a receiver site among neighbours and determine at which height you should install an antenna on the receiver site. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. A special pointer ( ) pinpoints the location of the current point in the map window. To view the exact location of a high elevation point in the map window: Click a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The site coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The altitude (in m). The curvature of the Earth (in m). the line is dotted. The line lengths and the symbol position on the line depend on the receiver height defined in the 360° View Properties dialogue. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The point coordinates (in the display coordinate system). To get information about a receiver site: Place the mouse cursor on the site in the 360° View tab. To return from the Terrain Section tab to the 360° View tab: Click the 360° View tab in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.e. The direction (in °). The direction (in °). Two purple markers on both sides of the 360° View tab show the pylon height (i. - 182 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . - To display the terrain profile between the studied site and the receiver site: Right-click the site in the 360° View tab and select See Terrain Section from the context menu. The distance from the studied site (in m). the visible part is represented by a solid line whereas the hidden part is indicated by a dotted line. Note: The 360° View tab does not display any depth of field. The line position on the vertical axis depends on the site altitude which includes the Earth curvature. if a site is partly visible from the studied site. The height of the studied site is indicated by a blue dotted line. Each neighbour site is indicated by a vertical red line and its symbol. Finally. The site is automatically selected and centered in the map window. To get information about a high elevation point: Place the mouse cursor on a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. The pylon height (in m).111: 360° View Tool The 360° View tab shows the points of highest elevations in every direction around the selected site. Neighbour sites around the studied one are displayed according to their directions. If it is entirely hidden by an obstable. the maximum height not to be exceeded if you install an antenna on the site) defined for the studied site.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. the line is solid. If the site is entirely visible from the studied site. The 360° View tab provides you with the following options: To center the receiver site in the map window: Click the site in the 360° View tab.

- - Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters 1. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). : Increase the angle of view on the left. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. Atoll displays the position of other sites within the view. : Decrease the angle of view on the right : Rotate the angle of view on the right. respectively.The altitude (in m). The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. To change the angle of view and the azimuth of the studied site: Click the following buttons available on both sides of the 360° View tab. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site. : Increase the angle of view on the right. Atoll will display the view between -45° and 45°.Transmitter Side and Height . Click the Clutter tab. For each clutter class. For information on parameters which can be changed. Beamwidth: Enter the angle of view to be considered. 5. see “Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters” on page 183. 7. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. 8. Under Height . Under Earth Curvature Factors. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Each site is indicated by a vertical line (red by default). where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 2. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. Clearance: If you want. Position of the Other Sites: When you select this option. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. define the first k factor value. Right-click the 360° view tab. : Rotate the angle of view on the left. 3. On the Display tab. Select 360° View Properties from the context menu. 4. Then. To configure the 360° view calculation parameters and display options: Right-click the 360° View tab and select 360° View Properties from the context menu. They are displayed in purple by default. Height of the Selected Site: When you select this option.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height.The clutter height at the point (in m). define the following parameters: a. : Decrease the angle of view on the left. b.The curvature of the Earth (in m). Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management . Atoll displays a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default) to indicate the height of the selected site. If you enter a beamwidth of 90° and an azimuth of 0°. . Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. Azimuth: Enter the azimuth of the selected site. 6. 10. Click OK. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. The context menu appears. . 9. Under Penetration Condition. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 183 . you can define the following parameters: Pylon Height: When you select this option. Atoll displays two markers on both sides of the window to represent the pylon height defined for the studied site. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class.

For each clutter class. Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area. 7. Under Height . Atoll will automatically assign a different colour to each line-of-sight area. define the following parameters: a. Clearance: If you want. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. You can improve the location of a site. c. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. 3. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Under Height . Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. as explained in "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19.Receiver Side. you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of each microwave link: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sight areas. 6. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. b.Transmitter Side. Atoll with display all line-of-sight areas in the same colour. To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection: 1. You can also let Atoll display the mutually visible areas of multiple sites so as to find good places to create new sites. 2.Receiver Side on the Calculation Parameters tab. 9. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line-of-sight area. 10. Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour.Atoll User Manual 7. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. you can set the following: Receiver Height: If you want. Click the Clutter tab. Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined number of sites: 184 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area: Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class. Atoll will use the receiver height you define in the Default Height box. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Right-click the Sites folder. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site. On the Display tab. Displaying the Mutually Visible Areas of Multiple Sites Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. The intersection of lineof-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone. selecting a colour from the palette. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. 5. by moving the slider. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Under Earth Curvature Factors. Under Penetration Condition. define the first k factor value. Click the Display tab. You can select one of the following display options: One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define the colour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in: Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. 8. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites.2. - 11.3 Search Tools for New Sites Atoll provides different tools to find new microwave site locations. This is the value that will be taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height . in terms of reception and transmission. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. The context menu appears. 4.

The context menu appears. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location.3. For information on the Legend window. Dx and Dy. "Checking Data Consistency" on page 192.1 Definition of a Microwave Link The parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette. "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. Comments: Any comment about the microwave link. respectively. respectively. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. respectively. 7. 2. Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. respectively. Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link. To delete the line-of-sight areas: 1. Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and interference analysis. Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link.. Activity: The microwave link activity status. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 192. Dx and Dy. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basing them on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link. "Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template" on page 190. Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette. • Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link. X and Y. etc. A site can support one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. The Properties dialogue has seven tabs: • The General tab: Name: The name of the microwave link. and is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. Length: The calculated length. A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas. "Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links" on page 192. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna positions as offsets with respect to the site location. is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and 60 GHz. Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. one for transmission and one for reception. The baseband signal. containing the user data. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. transceiver equipment. Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. The Radio tab: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 185 . In this section. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulation scheme used. 12. Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. Click OK. X and Y.3 Creating Microwave Links A microwave radio link. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29. 13. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end. in Atoll. 7. Atoll displays results on the map. "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna positions. installed at both. "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188. In Atoll.

port settings is not mandatory. Nominal power: The output power after tuning. the appearance of the button changes ( ) beside the antenna ). ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. When the filter is active. Channels: The channel(s) allocated to the site. you can select up to two waveguides. you can define if it is used either for transmission or reception only. This parameter can be defined for biderectional links only. In this case. Az. Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller). When the filter is active. or frequency diversity. the appearance of the button changes ( ). For information on taking power control into consideration. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the - - antenna model field. Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception. Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. or for both transmission and reception directions and select the waveguide model. In this case. Under Antennas. In this case. values for transmission and reception attenuation. Atoll proposes 186 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Tilt. If you want. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on the site. This value is used when no sub-band is defined. You can configure the channels. Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link./Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. it equals the central frequency of the frequency band.. Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. If you want. If you want. By default. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( model field. Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site. Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on. Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i. By default. ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. to allow communication in both ways). you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the antenna model field. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m (where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available as standby channels). Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band.e. Atoll provides in the list the sub-band. you can define the following parameters: - - • The Connections tab: Under Waveguides and Cables.Atoll User Manual A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B. B>>A: transmission from Site B to Site A). you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link: - ( ). This parameter is taken from the equipment properties. Model: You can select a piece of equipment. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Equipment Compatibility table. This parameter helps Atoll determine which antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations. For other configurations. When the filter is active. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the frequency sub-band field. If you want. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link Model: The antenna model. For further information on port settings. Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power. the polarisation and the channel port status. the appearance of the button changes Under Equipment. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. By default. Note: Ports have to be configured if you use dual polarized antennas. see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. By default. whose frequency spacing corresponds to the standardised channel bandwidth calculated for the installed equipment. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equipment. In this case. Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres). - Under Frequencies. By default./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. For each of them. transmission and reception port numbers. the appearance of the button changes ( ). Atoll lists all frequency sub-bands available for the microwave link frequency band. When the filter is active. you can define either the frequency or the sub-band and channels. Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table.

For more information. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. Under Connection Losses. Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season).01% of the average year based on Rec.99% of the average year). The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. ITU-R P. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. the rainfall observed 99. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. ITU-R P. ITU-R P.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre.01% of the average year (or. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management in the list. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file.530-12. you can select the following climatic zones: • The Geoclimatic tab: - Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as the quality calculation method. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 187 .835-3 (and select a season).01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.1510-0. reception.530-12: Under ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. in other words. ITU-R P. Temperate and Dry.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded). Rainfall exceeded 0. click the Display All button available under Current Methods. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec.836-3. You can also add a Shielding Factor. or on both transmission and reception. ITU-R P. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. To access all geoclimatic parameters whatever the methods you have selected. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. you can choose between Warm and Humid. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected in the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables. you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission. Atoll displays the attenuation. or based on Rec. ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Rec.835-3 (and select a season). Current Methods: Under Current Methods. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. ITU-R P. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. You can also enter the length of each waveguide. The different geoclimatic parameters are described below: Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec.

see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. 530-5 or Rec. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. Method: Under K. -8 and Vigants-Barnett. you can enter the C factor value. Under Geoclimatic Factor. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you define whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m.Atoll User Manual Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec.530-5. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m.Q. you can define the PL factor. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. -8: Under ITU-R P. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. -8. ITU-R P.Q method.. For information on creating a link class.530-5. calculated using the set parameters. ITU-R P. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method.Q.453-9. using a userdefined reference altitude. Each link class can have different performance objectives. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. ITU-R P. you can define K. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. for the K. • Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. the k factor median value. you assign the performance objectives to the link. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. Under Refractivity.530. through the microwave link’s Properties 188 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . ITU-R P.Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. If you select the Simplified Method option.839-3 (and select a season). • 7. Atolldisplays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone. you can choose between "Open Areas" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. you can select the link class. Method. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). If you are using ITU-R P.530-5. the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference.530-5 or 530-8 methods. ITU-R P. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. For more information on the geoclimatic file.530: Under ITU-R P.Q.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link You can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. is displayed. . you can define propagation-related parameters: . - - • The Reliability tab: Link Class: Under Link Class. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. If no propagation model is selected. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. The Propagation tab. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. For more information on the geoclimatic file. If you select the User-defined option under Multipath Occurence. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". you can choose between "Flat Terrain".3.530-5.Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. K. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. you can select the Terrain Type. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. ITU-R P. you can define the K factor. The Display tab. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. You can access the properties of a microwave link. ITU-R P. If you select the Terrain-based Method option. Vigants-Barnett: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.

Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. You can configure port parameters for an individual microwave link or for all microwave links. b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. The context menu appears. The Ports Definition dialogue closes. 10. In case of frequency diversity.3 Defining Port Parameters In Atoll.3. 4. Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. 6. Click OK. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modifying an existing microwave link. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. The table opens. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). Define the following parameters: Link: the name of the microwave link. b. you can define either a frequency or the channels used. Select Properties from the context menu. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears. 13. 11. 2. 4. 5. Click OK. or frequency diversity. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. 3. To define port parameters for all microwave links: 1. The context menu appears. 3. Click the Expand button ( 3. After defining the configuration for one direction. They have to be defined if you use dual polarized antennas. 2. ports are used to configure channel(s) in detail. Select the Radio tab. Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. Select Ports > Open table. To define port parameters for a single microwave link: 1. Click the Port Parameter Settings button. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Defined the Half-band used on SiteA. 2. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears. Polarisation: The signal polarisation. Click OK. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 189 . ) to expand the Links folder. Select Properties from the context menu. select a Sub-Band for the SiteA of the microwave link. d. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. port settings is not mandatory. you can define the opposite direction by clicking the Initialise Symmetrically button. Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m. Additional parameters appear. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( c. two channels with diversity status are required. 9. e. 7.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management dialogue. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. For other configurations. The number must be from 1 to 10. 7. The number must be from 1 to 10. If you are creating a new microwave link: a. Select New from the context menu. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Properties dialogue appears. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. 12. c. Under Frequencies. 8. d. To create or modify a microwave link: 1. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction: Channel: The channel number. Click Apply. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. ) to expand the Links folder.

you can create new microwave links based on link templates. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. The tools for working with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 7. In the Microwave toolbar. 4. Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it. The site is now one extremity of the microwave link. The pointer now changes ( ). On two existing sites using a link template. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites: a. b. 5. By default. Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB. 3. define the following parameters: Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link. The pointer changes ( The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you clicked on the map. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites: a. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. 7. 2. Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY. The number must be from 1 to 10. Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link. ). The Link Creation dialogue appears. Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. In the Link Creation dialogue. select a link template from the list. Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. and passive repeaters. click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. Click OK.3. where SiteX is the name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created). Figure 7. 2. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. Channel: the channel number. two channels with diversity status are required. To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template: 1. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n").3.112: The Microwave toolbar In this section. 7. ). Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link. select a link template from the list. 5. Polarisation: the signal polarisation. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.112).Atoll User Manual Way: the link direction (AB or BA). The pointer now changes ( b. transmitters. You can create a microwave link in the following ways: • • Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template With Atoll. In the map window. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates Atoll comes with microwave link templates. Select Between Sites from the menu. the following are explained: • • "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 190 . In case of frequency diversity. The microwave link is now created between the two sites. The number must be from 1 to 10. 4. In the Microwave toolbar. but you can also create and modify microwave link templates. 3. To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template: 1. Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment. Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB.

3. The Properties dialogue appears.3. by selecting the existing link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create. Click OK. modify or delete a field in the link templates: 1. select the template you want to delete.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management • "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 7. click the arrow to the right of the list. click the Add button to add a field. In the Radio toolbar. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. or the Delete button to delete a user-defined field.5. In the Microwave toolbar. 7. Select Manage Templates from the list.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template To add. The new link template will be available in the template menu. To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates. 2. 5. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it. In the Radio toolbar. you can modify the properties of any link template.5. 4. 5. The context menu appears. you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. select the link template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. 2. Note: If you add a field to the link templates. Click OK. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the map. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one: To create a new link template: Under Available Templates. To create a link template based on an existing microwave link 1. in a complex radio-planning project. 3. 7. Select Manage Templates from the list. Click the Delete button. It is available in the list of the Microwave toolbar. 2. click the arrow to the right of the list. click the arrow to the right of the list. you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 191 .1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template You can create a link template based on an existing microwave link. 7. 3. 5. 4. the Properties button to modify properties. The new link template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. The Properties dialogue appears. For information on the fields available in the open window. In the dialogue that appears. 3. The link template is deleted. select the link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create and click Add. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. As well. Select Manage Templates from the list. 4. clicking them in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select one link or site. Click OK. If there is more than one link between the same sites or if there are two sites in close proximity. although it might be visible in the map window. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window.3. Under Available Templates. However.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template To delete a link template: 1. Select Save As A Template from the context menu. Therefore. you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Fields button. To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template: 1. see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab.3.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map In Atoll. 2. The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on.5.

For example. Frequency sub-band definition: The frequency band must be defined. Antenna separation is a non-zero value when space diversity is used on a link. For example. in the form of a label that is displayed with the object.): Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that: XPIFvalue of the equipment is a non-zero value when XPIC system is used on a link.3. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of some data. Click OK to perform the audit. For information on defining the tooltips. however. you can restrict 192 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .. in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label. such as each site or microwave link. define the parameters of the audit: Frequency Consistency: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify: Frequency band definition: The minimum frequency must be lower than the maximum frequency. In such a situation.e. the frequency band of antennas. For information on defining the microwave link colour.Atoll User Manual Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • • • • • "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18 "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20.3. might be responsible for the planning for only one city. equipment. you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish microwave links by frequency bands. including from fields that you add. 7. or to distinguish inactive from active microwave links. the frequency defined must be within the frequency band limits. the number of channels must not exceed the number of channels allowed by the equipment. multi-hops with no link). it is not necessary. because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. Pattern attenuations are considered the same if they differ less than 1 dB. You. Other (XPIC. or unused repeaters. - - List All Verifications: Select this check box if you want to display all verifications performed in addition to detected inconsistencies. Microwave link colour: You can set the microwave link colour to display information about the microwave link. The Microwave Data Check dialogue appears. a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. This enables you not only to display selected information. and when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle. but also to distinguish microwave links at a glance. excluded channels must belong to the list of channels and at least one channel must be available.3.8 Checking Data Consistency You can perform an audit of the microwave link network. Tooltips: You can display information about each object. To perform an audit of the microwave link network: 1. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. the channels must belong to the selected frequency sub-band. 3. waveguides and frequency sub-band must be the same as the link frequency band and. Link definition: at least one direction must be selected. you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. In the Microwave Data Check dialogue. such as each site or microwave link. For information on defining the label. including from fields that you add. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22.. the antenna vertical and horizontal patterns must be correctly aligned at the extremities (Antenna patterns are correctly aligned when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links Atoll allows to you to display information about microwave links in a number of different ways. point-to-multipoints with no link).e. undefined point-to-multipoints (i. Antenna Separation. The following tools can be used to display information about microwave links: • Label: You can display information about each object. too much information will lead to a cluttered display. • • 7. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. Select Tools > Data Audit > Microwave Data Check from the context menu.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database. Atoll displays the results of the audit in the Events Viewer. The label is always displayed. etc. 7. Consequently. doing engineering and interference studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time. 2.) - Undefined Records: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify if there are undefined multi-hops (i.

its frequency band. It includes any passive repeaters composing the link. You can combine a computation zone and a filter. you must configure its antennas.1. or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account).1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile In Atoll. • Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied. "Printing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 195. each with its own advantages: • Filtering the desired sites and microwave links You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. You can also open Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window using the Profile Analysis button ( the toolbar. In Atoll. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.4. see "Filtering Data" on page 62. with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS).4. limits the number of sites and microwave links to be calculated. see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 71. it is displayed in the profile tab by a vertical line in the profile.1 Displaying the Path Profile In this section. there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied. you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link. "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201. Along the profile. At the top of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31. 7. "Studying Microwave Link Clearance" on page 194.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. "Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile" on page 195. For information on computation zones. you can select which part of the profile you want to display: • • • Site A ==> Site P Site P ==> Site B Site B ==> Site P © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 193 . Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu. 7. When a repeater is inserted on the link. "Zooming In on the Profile" on page 194. "Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values" on page 197 7. which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. equipment. it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites.4 Analysing the Path Profile Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. This enables you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study. in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave links to be studied. "Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options" on page 194. For information on filtering. if the signal meets an obstacle. Before studying a microwave link. To open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window: 1. The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. The context menu appears. 2. "Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights" on page 200. and the propagation model you want to use. The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoid the most. For information on focus zones. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. In this section. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Path Profile" on page 193. ) in The Profile tab provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. You can filter sites and microwave links according to one or more fields. You can make a microwave link profile analysis using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. interference). The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distance on the horizontal axis. In addition.

These values can be set through the advanced options available by clicking the button ( ) opposite the Link list.Atoll User Manual • • • Site P ==> Site A Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P) Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P) When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link. you can hide or display the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link. while the second related to the second k value is shown in red. To open the microwave link profile display options window: 1. The context menu appears. it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically. the clearance is referred to as F. 4. Atoll displays the clearance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k. and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular. 194 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can define whether the reflections should be displayed or not. 7. The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue.4.1.1. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. On the Reflection tab. 2.4. the clearance is referred to as F’. On the Ellipsoid and Antenna Beamwidth tab. Select the microwave link to analyse. Select Display Options from the context menu. Select the microwave link to analyse. a green coloured line is drawn from the transmitter to the first obstacle’s highest point.1.4 Zooming In on the Profile Atoll enables you to zoom in on the profile. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations and the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed. and whether you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites.4. 8. and reflection paths you want to display. either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones. On the Display tab. To hide or display the Fresnel zones: 1. and the angles of incidence for both antennas. this feature is described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section. F’1 for the first k factor value and F’2 for the second one. you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters. 6. 4. the profile display options include Site Q as well. When displaying the clearance. 2. You can view the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor).2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance The Profile tab allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. 7. F1 for the first k factor value and F2 for the second one. If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. You can left-click the Link button in the Profile tab and choose from the context menu: • Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue. 3. 3. it indicates the tilts/direct ray. the azimuths. 5. When the percentage of the Fresnel ellipsoid is different from 100%. The context menu appears. 7. A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle that introduces the highest loss in the link. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids. Select Display Fresnel ellipsoids from the context menu. You can also display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver. both first and second. Here.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options The Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool enables you to manage parameters that affect the display of the profile. In addition. you can define the percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids to be shown. Click OK. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 7. Note: When 100% of the Fresnel ellipsoid is displayed.

To display the details on a point of a microwave link profile: 1. 4. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. 2. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.113).1. 3. 3. Select the microwave link to analyse. (see Figure 7. 2. 2. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.1. 2. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. The context menu appears. Click OK to print. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile You can display the clearance values of a microwave link using either the Profile tab or the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool. Select the microwave link to analyse. 7. 3. To restore the initial profile: 1. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 4. Drag to the opposite corner. Select Zoom In from the context menu. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.1. Select Print from the context menu. The window displays the following information for each selected point along the profile: Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. In this section. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile. Select the microwave link to analyse. 3. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. The context menu appears. A separate window opens displaying details of the selected point. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu.4. 7.4.6. Move the pointer along the profile. When you release the mouse button. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 5. 6. the following are described: • • "Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 195 "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196 7. 4. The context menu appears.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To zoom in on the Profile: 1. To print the content of the Profile tab: 1.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile You can print a microwave link profile. Distance up to Optical Path: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer. 5. 4. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. Select the microwave link to analyse. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 195 . 5.4.

6. Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height.113: Microwave Link Analysis window – Profile tab As as you drag the pointer along the profile in the Microwave Link Analysis window.4. When you place the pointer on this special cursor.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. Select Engineering > Values from the context menu. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (percentage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). 2. Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files). Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to view all the profile analysis data for each selected point along the microwave link profile. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Clutter: the clutter class. the following information appears in a tool tip: Coordinates: The cursor coordinates given in the display coordinate system. Clutter Height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file. the pointer changes ( ) to indicate the location of the current point along the profile in the map window.1. This value is relative to the bottom of the Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value. Clearance: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. You can also access the Values tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Values tab. To display the profile data using the Values tab: 1. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer 7. Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. The Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window displays the following values for each point along the profile: Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site. The context menu appears. 196 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

where X is the highest resolution of clutter class and DTM maps.1 Editing Profile Values Some values (e. In this section. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values The geographic details provided on the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool are stored in a table. Figure 7.. 3.4.115). Click the Edit button. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. To edit the profile values in the table: 1. 2. the clutter height and the clutter category) can be edited in the table or using the mouse. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field.g.1. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished updating the table.115: The Values tab when editing. You can edit the following columns: Altitude: The altitude (DTM) Clutter: The clutter class Clutter Height: The clutter height Category: The clutter category.114: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab 7. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.7. To edit profile values using the mouse: 1. 2.4. You can modify some profile values at any point along the profile and immediately check the impact of these modifications in the Profile tab. the altitude.1.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. The resolution of the information given depends on the resolution of the geographic data: information is given every X metres. the clutter class. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Editing Profile Values" on page 197 "Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones" on page 198 "Copying and Pasting Profile Values" on page 199 "Exporting Profile Values" on page 199 "Importing Profile Values" on page 199 "Saving the Edited Profile Values" on page 199 "Refreshing the Profile Values" on page 199 7. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 197 . Right-click the profile view.

119: Clutter categories in edit mode. Figure 7. The pointer changes ( ). Clutter: Select Clutter if you want to edit clutter classes (see Figure 7. i. i. ii. The pointer changes ( ). Click the point you want to edit.1. Drag the point to its new altitude.2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones When you are editing the profile as explained in "Editing Profile Values" on page 197. Select Zoom In from the context menu. ii. Select one of the following columns in the table: Altitude: Select Altitude if you want to edit ground altitudes (see Figure 7. Click the line.Atoll User Manual 4.118). 7. Category: Select Category if you want to edit clutter categories (see Figure 7. Drag to the opposite corner and release the mouse button. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. Figure 7.116: Ground in edit mode.7. Drag the line or point to change the area with the corresponding clutter class.117). Drag the point to its new clutter height. In the profile. you can view reflection areas and vegetation zones. 198 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .119). Click the line or point. ii. i.4. The clutter classes are displayed with lines separating the clutter classes if clutter heights are defined or with points if clutter heights are not defined. Figure 7.118: Clutter classes in edit mode. Drag the line to change the area with the corresponding clutter category. The pointer changes ( ). i. You can see lines separating the clutter categories. The pointer changes ( ). Figure 7. Click the point you want to edit. ii. click one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 7.116). Clutter Height: Select Clutter Height if you want to edit clutter heights (see Figure 7. 6. 5.117: Clutter heights in edit mode.

115). Reflection areas are displayed with a pattern ( ). the changes are not automatically saved and will be lost if you select another link or if you close the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Click the Actions button and select Export. Click the Edit button. 2. Click the Actions button and select Import. To copy and paste profile values in the table: 1. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 3. click the Actions button and select Paste. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells. press CTRL+D.7. 7. clutter classes. and clutter categories in the table.1. The Import dialogue appears. 2. 4. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Right-click the profile view and select one of the following options from the context menu: Display Reflection Areas: Select Display Reflection Areas to view reflection areas taken into account in the reflection analysis and reflecting paths.6 Saving the Edited Profile Values When you edit the data in the profile table. Vegetation zones without foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To display reflection areas and vegetation zones: 1.3 Copying and Pasting Profile Values You can copy and paste some profile values such as altitude. 3.7. Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage to view vegetation zones without foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses.4. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.4 Importing Profile Values You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of the Values tab. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 7.1. 2. 2. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 3.. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Hide Zones: Select Hide Zones to hide reflection areas and vegetation zones. Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage to view zones with foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.115).7. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.4. 4. The Export dialogue appears. press CTRL+U. Display Slopes: Select Display Slopes to view the slope of the selected reflection area. Only editable values (i. To export profile values: 1.115).4. 3. clutter heights. Click the cell with the data you want to copy and drag to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells. clutter heights. you can save them in the link properties. Click the Actions button and select Commit Values to Link. You must already have selected Display Reflection Areas if you want to Display Slopes.1. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 4.4. Define export settings as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.e.4. Define import settings as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. To import data into the table: 1. Click the Edit button. Click the Edit button.7. 2. - - 7. and clutter categories) can be imported. Click the Edit button.5 Exporting Profile Values You can export the entire table or selected columns to ASCII text files (in TXT or CSV formats) and MS Excel files. 2. altitude. To save the edited profile values: 1. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.7 Refreshing the Profile Values You can restore the original link profile values from the geographic data diles and replace the edited values.1.7. clutter classes.1.115). Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 7.115). 7. To restore the original link profile values: 1.115). Zones with foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). If you want. Click the Edit button. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 199 . 3. Click the Edit button.

Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. The context menu appears. The Height Optimisation dialogue appears.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights You can enter a new height for the antenna of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.4. To modify antenna heights using the mouse: 1. ). these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. 7. 7. the following are explained: • • • "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200.4. Select Save Hx and Tilt. To modify the antenna height: 1. 2.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to modify the antenna height of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. you should define the antenna height to avoid any obstruction of the line-ofsight signal and reflections.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights When designing a microwave link network. The context menu appears. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. you can modify or optimise microwave links antenna heights. Click the button beside the microwave links list ( 3. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). from the context menu. 3. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site.2. 7. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. In this section. You can enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. Select the optimisation method: Clearance Condition Method: The Clearance Condition Method is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. In Atoll. 2.2.4.2.Atoll User Manual 3. To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna: 1. Select Save Hx and Tilt. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ) and enter the exact antenna height. 7. you can modify antenna heights using the mouse or enter new values and see the clearance and penetration parameters displayed. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Atoll allows you to calculate and adjust the microwave link antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. ) (the pointer changes ) and drag it up or down to modify the antenna 3. When defined.4. Click the antenna height pointer ( height. When defined. 2.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights Atoll enables you to automatically calculate antenna heights in order to avoid reflections and profile obstructions. 200 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. Atoll will determine antenna heights in order to fulfil the highest constraint. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 4. Click the Actions button and select Refresh Geo Data. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). from the context menu. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. The context menu appears. 4. 4. Using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu.

The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected by a short feeder cable. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading. Due to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders". Right-click the the antenna height pointer ( menu appears. distortions and rain etc. normally having different lengths and different inclinations. X and Y. Dx and Dy." In this section. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 201 . Only the height of the other antenna (assuming it is not loced as well) will be calculated to optimise the link. these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. Select Save Ha. The context menu appears.3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. 7.The context 8. Antenna Position: You can modify the Antenna Position.g. There are two main types of passive repeaters. This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles. you can always restore the last antenna height value by selecting Restore from the same menu. Hb and Tilts from the context menu to save the current antenna heights and tilts in the microwave link. ) for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise. 9. "Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 202. If defined. each traversing different type terrain. respectively. In Atoll. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab Name: The passive repeater name. it calculates antenna heights to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone). Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites: • • • • • No power is required No regular road access is required No equipment housing is needed They are environmentally friendly Little or no maintenance is required.e. The second type is a plane reflector type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal. Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities. Atoll can model both types of passive repeaters and provide you with access to all the relevant parameters. This enables you to prevent the antenna height from being modified during the optimisation process. Site Site B or Repeater P Site B)... respectively.3. i. if you wish.4. 6. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. . Select the Take into account the reflection areas check box and define the range of k factor values (kmin and kmax) to be used during the antenna height optimisation if you want to take reflection into consideration. Click OK. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e. you can estimate the growth of vegetation (Projected tree or foliage growth). You can also use the context menu to lock the antenna height. .1 Description of a Passive Repeater The parameters of a passive repeater can be found in the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involving one or more repeaters.4. 7. The following sections explain how Atoll models passive repeaters.e. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab). a "repeater" is always a "passive repeater. 7. These advantages mean that passive repeaters can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas. the following are explained: • • • "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201.. these are often called passive reflectors or plane reflectors.Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management If you have out-of-date clutter class maps. Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutter height. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. Furthermore. 10.Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. Minimum Diffraction Loss Method: Atoll determines antenna heights to minimise diffraction losses due to the main obstacle (i. these height limits are represented on the Profile tab. Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table). 5. "Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater" on page 202. Passive repeaters divide the radio path into two branches.

For information on copying and pasting data. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder. you can choose the antenna. In this case. e. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of transmission. ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. The context menu appears. 7. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the model field.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater You can modify an existing passive repeater or you can create a new passive repeater. define the following parameters: Under Antenna1. b. Modify the parameters described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. For a reflector type repeater. b. Height: The reflector height. you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. define these parameters: Surface: The surface area for the repeater. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. define the antenna height. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Right-click the Links folder. You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. Tip: If you are creating several passive repeaters at the same time. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of reception. and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation. By default. To create or modify a passive repeater: 1. You can click the Calculate button ( - For a back-to-back antenna type repeater. 4. or modifying several existing passive repeaters. If you are creating a new passive repeater: a. The Passive Repeaters table appears. d. The context menu appears. Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission. The Passive Repeaters New Element Properties dialogue appears. you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Passive Repeaters table. You can open the Passive Repeaters table by rightclicking the Links folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. Select Record Properties from the context menu. When the filter is active. the appear- ance of the button changes ( ). c.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site. When you create a passive microwave repeater. c. you can add it to an existing site. ) next You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( to the corresponding item. described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. 3.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll. 7.3. Click OK. d. • The Type tab Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. Select Passive Repeaters > New from the context menu. or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. you can choose the antenna.4.3. Right-click the passive repeater in the Passive Repeaters table. The passive repeater’s Properties dialogue appears.4. Under Waveguide. If you want. 2. Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission. f. you can choose the waveguide and define the length. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new passive repeater or modifying an existing passive repeater. You can access the properties of a passive repeater. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater. 202 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . define the antenna height. Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with the selected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47. Under Antenna2. through the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue.

To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. In practice. average annual temperature. a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any). see "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. This allows you to predict the received signal level and to calculate the thermal fade margin. Defining global parameters is explained in "Global Parameters" on page 156. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. You can assign a link class to all microwave links at once. Site A Site P. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the microwave link path. Site Q Site B. Site P Site A.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link When you create a microwave link. terrain roughness calculations.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. You can assign a propagation model to all microwave links at once. Ideally. radio parameters. In this section. or directly on the map. The repeater is placed on the map. Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater you want to create. to a group of microwave links.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. Site Q Site P. you must assign a propagation model. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 203 . Select the microwave link. 7. A microwave link reliability analysis determines whether a designed system will operate successfully. Before analysing the microwave link reliability. or to a single microwave link.5. The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. "Analysing Microwave Links" on page 206. Click the map to place the repeater. diffraction loss. Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types and give target performance objectives to microwave links. The following terms are used in Atoll for passive repeaters and related parameters: • • Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively. 3. 4. Reliability analysis takes into consideration the parameters of fade margin. Note: You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151. represented by the site symbol ( ). define the microwave link class and related performance objectives and set the calculation parameters. "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 208. this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link due the continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the directions of the two sections of the microwave link. Site A Site B Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Assigning a link class is explained in "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154. 2. 7. For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater." A section can be: One of the directions of a bi-directional link. or to a single microwave link. antenna parameters. you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. to a group of microwave links. Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table that is assigned to the newly created repeater. A part of the link is called a "Section. the following are explained: • • • "Analysing a Single Microwave Link" on page 203. For example: Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section. Site B Site Q. transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses. Calculation parameters include global parameters applied to all microwave links and link parameters such as geoclimatic and reliability parameters defined per link. Setting link parameters is explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. Site P Site Q. Site A Site B and Site B Site A Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections.

The Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window contains the link budget for the link being studied. Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information: • Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name. capacity. Requirements: the required output power you can compare to the current output power displayed in brackets. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studied microwave link as detailed below. Select Engineering > Report from the context menu. You can also open the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Report tab. azimuths. repeaters (if any). and immediately display the impact of the modifications in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window (both Profile and Report tabs). minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration). BBER). Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. site names. transmitter powers. the equipment installed at each site (name. This tab contains the report generated after the calculation of required margins. capacities and configurations. ESR. any modifications made to the profile of the microwave link using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window or any modifications in the geography of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab. it is possible to modify the properties of the microwave link. digital hierarchy employed. Microwave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information: • Summary: Under Summary. the thermal fade margin. the worst month quality (in % of time) and the average annual availability (in % of time). The context menu appears. a snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window in order to facilitate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report and an extract of the map window showing the studied link and the surrounding area. Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu. its length and calculation parameters (propagation model. the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. location. the operating frequency band of the microwave link.Atoll User Manual In this section.1. "Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters" on page 205. "Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report" on page 206 7. modulation used.5. models for availability and quality calculations. • • • • • 7. how much you have to decrease or increase the maximum power and the required antenna diameter. quality objectives (SESR. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. heights. diameters and near fields. the following are explained: • • • • • "Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins" on page 204 "Calculating a Microwave Link Budget" on page 204. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity. ATPC effects. To calculate the microwave link required margins: 1. The context menu appears. heights. or the calculation parameters. minimal channel bandwidths. data rates. altitude and coordinate system). calculated and required thermal fade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin. margin against discrimination reduction. Therefore. you can read whether quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. i. Furthermore. Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calculations. Moreover. tilts.. • • 204 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters. antennas used at both sites with their respective models. their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required margin.e. 2. compatible digital hierarchy.1. tilts. locations.5. azimuths. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. the link length. rate. This will open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window with the EPO tab displayed by default. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section. modulation used. total losses comprising filter losses.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins Atoll allows you to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class. 2. gains. passive repeater gains (if any). whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account). gains and diameters. To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link: 1.2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget Atoll provides you with a detailed microwave link budget tool. Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive fading. ESR. margin against enhancements. a basic budget including the operating frequency band. a global estimation of the cut off duration over an average year taking into account both link quality and availability. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. BBER) and availability objectives (SESR. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as the models. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. and altitudes for both extremities.

PL percentage. You can set the following options: Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation). click the Actions button. enhancement forecast). see "Global Parameters" on page 156. OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the report without modifying the microwave link properties. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. connection losses. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 205 . select the Take Frequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management connection losses. Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. details for the average year (rain fading. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. You can define the studied port.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by changing some calculation options. ESR. port connection losses. click the Actions button. These results include the outage probability. the outage probability. ESR. outage probability due to faults for the average year and the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). These results include availability of hot standby. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS).01% of time). quality model. and availability objectives (SESR. Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. The context menu appears. climatic factor. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. click one of the following: Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and click OK to close the dialogue. rain intensity (exceeding 0. shielding losses. interference. BER values. The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. ESR (required). Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas. ESR (required). thermal noise. fading due to discrimination reduction. These results include the outage probability. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. and waveguides and cable losses. 2. select the Take Space Diversity into Account check box and define the following: Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas. losses due to water vapour. temperature. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. fading due to discrimination reduction). the channel. Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation into account. Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). BBER). losses due to dry air. the transmission and reception port numbers. and waveguides and cable losses.. or change calculation models. water vapour density. Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. • • • • • • • • This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. BBER (required)). availability model. selective fading. 2. For further information. port connection losses. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. overflow thresholds. free space loss. quality objectives (SESR. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. 3. shared losses. rain attenuation. the port circulator and attenuator losses. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year.1. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising filter losses. shared losses. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report. The context menu appears. the corresponding frequency. Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. Propagation: the nominal received signal level. diffraction losses. 3. BBER (required)). shielding losses. the outage probability. polarisation at both sites. To modify calculation parameters for analysis: 1. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). When you have finished modifying analysis parameters.5. earth curvature factor (k). the polarisation. etc. BBER). Select Calculation Parameters. Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. To modify analysis parameters for a link: 1. 4. 7. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). space diversity and frequency diversity). propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation.

The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. d. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. by frequency band). 7.1.2 Analysing Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. Click one style. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. You can launch simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. click the Actions button and select Configure Report.Atoll User Manual 7.1. and intersect the computation zone.e. Select Export in order to export the link budget report in RTF format. To display a result. a. Atoll carries out the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active. Select Print in order to print the link budget report. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. When you create a computation zone. select its check box. a.5. To print or export the report: 1.5.2. In other words. When working with a large network. Click OK. select the Reset button. b. click the Actions button in the window to open its context menu. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. if you have drawn a computation zone. b.5.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report After you have configured the reports displayed in the Report and EPO tabs. b. select the Reset button. Centred and Align Right. Choose how to align the paragraph. Before calculating one or more link budgets. If there is no computation zone defined. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. The results are displayed in the form of a report. that are selected by the current filter parameters). c. you can decide whether or not to activate them.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report and EPO tabs to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. To change the font. 4. To restore the initial style. 2. Click the Style tab. 7. clear its check box. a.g.. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). you can create a computation zone. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. To configure the report display: 1. you can print them or export them. Quality. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active Once microwave links are set up within a network. You can choose beween Align Left. c.5. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. For information on the computation zone.. select the AaBbYyZz button. To hide a result. availability and interference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered 206 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In this section. The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. the following are explained: • • • • "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 206 "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207 "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207 "Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity" on page 208 7. 3. Microwave links in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e. d. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. Click the Contents tab. filtered (i.

The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Field Selection dialogue appears. To select a field to be included in the report. ) to expand the Links folder. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row. from top to bottom. To change the order of the fields. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management microwave links). Define the content of the report: a. ) in the Links folder.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets You can calculate a link budget for all microwave links or for a group of microwave links. you can set the propagation model and other calculation parameters. Select Link Budgets > Properties from the context menu. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. b.5. you can define the content of the link budget report. The context menu appears. Select Activate Links from the context menu.2. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. see "Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll". 7. 2. Click Add. Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active. 2. select the check box in the Activate column. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. 3. The transmitter is now active. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 207 . inactive You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link as active by activating them from the Links context menu. 5. The context menu appears. The Properties dialogue appears. right-click the Links folder. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. 4. The selected microwave links are set as active. Select the microwave links you want to set as active: To set all microwave links as active. 5. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click OK to validate the selection of fields to be displayed in the report. 2. 2. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. c. 4. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu: 1. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. In the Field Selection dialogue. select the fields that you want to display in the report. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters. For each microwave link that you want to set as active. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. To define the content of the link budget report: 1. 4. In the Explorer window. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. 3. Select Open Table. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report Before calculating the link budget. The next time you configure a report. click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and rightclick the group of microwave links you want to set as active. 7. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table: 1.2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( 3. Right-click the Links folder.5. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Select Active Link from the context menu. active microwave links are displayed in red ( links are displayed in grey ( ). To set a group of microwave links as active. To set an individual microwave link as active: 1.

If geographic data maps have been updated. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu. unavailability due to faults). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. including valid ones.e. 7. and geo-climatic parameters. In the last case (e. To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. If microwave link properties have been modified. 2. microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. the fade margin. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. reception parameters (sensitivity. a multi-hop is managed as a group of microwave links. are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. the following are explained: • • "Creating Multi-hops" on page 208 "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 210 7.Atoll User Manual To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links: 1. etc.5.2. intermediate results such as propagation. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active" on page 210.).3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis AtollMulti-hop microwave links. or multi-hops. For the first two reasons. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP. Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link (sites. The context menu appears. In this section. A microwave link can be common to more than one multihop as well. antennas and equipment installed). In this section. b. various losses. It also details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air). 3. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding record in the report. unavailability due to rain. etc.. In general practice. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. 2. Atoll displays the link budget report. outage probabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. 208 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. Notes • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analysis over multi-hops. and recalculates the link budget.5.5. "Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally" on page 210. you can quickly perform a link budget for a group of links. if you added a new clutter class map). The context menu appears.). the signal level received. once calculations have been performed for all the links.3. to construct a microwave connection over areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances. All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied. the following are explained: • • • • • "Creating a Multi-hop" on page 209. Atoll removes existing calculations. you must force Atoll to recalculate.. calculation options.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity Link budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 7. various losses. and its quality and availability. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. Select Link Budgets > Calculate from the context menu. 3. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse" on page 209. So. "Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 209. To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget: 1.g.1 Creating Multi-hops In Atoll.

Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link. 2. 7. 11. By default. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link in the Multi-hops folder.5. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. but can be modified. b. c. In the map.1. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. The Multi-hops folder opens. The context menu appears. click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically.2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse To add a microwave link to a multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. On the map.1. 4. Select Add a Link from the context menu.3. The Multi-hops folder opens.1 Creating a Multi-hop To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click on the multi-hop link. Click on the map in each place you want to end a link and start a new link. 7. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop.1. Note: The Other Properties tab will appear if you have defined additional fields in the Multihops table. where "X" increments with each instance of a multi-hop link. Assign links to the multi-hop: a. Select a link from the Link column. ). Once you have selected a multi-hops class. b. Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop length to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop. The Microwave Radio Links folder ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. Click OK.3. Select the Links tab.5. Atoll names the newly created multi-hop link in the following manner: "Multi-hopsX". 10. d. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 3. Click the Multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. 7. you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the Browse button ( Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link: Either a. 3. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears. The pointer shape changes to 3. in the map window. 9. The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. 5. click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link.3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse To create a new multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. 8. Click OK. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. 2. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Expand button ( opens.3.5. b. The pointer changes ( ). Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 209 . Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. Or a. - 6. 4. Select New… from the context menu. The context menu appears. The next microwave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site parities). The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7.

you can modify.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. Select Mapping Between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. delete.5. 2.3. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop: 1. In Atoll. ESR. 210 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The End-to-End Analysis dialogue appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. and passive repeaters. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). BBER) compared to the required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and annual outage period. The context menu appears. Select Analysis from the context menu. 4. and polarisation of each transmitting site. quality indicators (probabilities of SESR. A reflected signal that can reach the receiver with enough strength and with a certain delay as compared to the direct signal can generate interference. 3. The Multi-Hop Links table appears. are also supported in the calculation. Quality and availability analyses only take into account active microwave links and not inactive or filtered microwave links). transmitters. This calculation is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations. add. 5. 7. Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you click. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. Expand the Multi-Hops folder by clicking the button 3.6 Studying Reflection Studying reflection is essential to designing any microwave link network. 4. The context menu appears. 4. The context menu appears. such as optic fibre links.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link. Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio. sub-band. To map multiple links to multi-hop links: 1.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally Atoll allows you to map multiple microwave links to the multi-hop links . To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link: 1.3. monthly and annual outage periods. 7. Atollcalculates the reflection point using 2-Ray model. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. quality (percentage over a month).1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The interference can generate a fading (called reflective fading) that can lower down the received signal. If no site exists.5. availability (percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year). Do one of the following: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active. Click the Expand button ( 3. margins. ) to expand the Multi-Hops folder.3.Atoll User Manual The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites. Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band. and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set. you can display reflection areas along the link profile and analyse the location of the reflection point and its impact on the received signal level. It contains the following information: Multi-hop link characteristics: the microwave links forming the multi-hop link.1. containing all the multi-hop links and their corresponding microwave links. In this table. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Reception characteristics: reception thresholds. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. total length of the multi-hop link. 7. Right-click the multi-hop that you want to analyse. In the Explorer window. channels. Note: Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies.5. 7.

The reflection can create destructive interference. Right-click the Profile tab. To display additional information: 1. The colour indicates if the reflection can generate destructive interference. it is not based on the defined clutter categories. Atolldisplays reflection areas and unobstructed reflected signals calculated for the first k factor value defined in the Profile tab. You can display additional information regarding reflected paths. the reflection analysis has to be performed for different k factor values. Display all the paths: Select the Display all the paths check box if you want to display all possible reflected signals within the reflection area. the reflected signal is not obstructed). For information on defining the range of k factor values. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile. 3. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 211 . This one is used to determine the reflection point. 5. you can select the following options: Display the reflections for the k factor range: Select the Display the reflections for the k factor range check box if you want to display unobstructed and obstructed reflected paths calculated for the defined range of k factor values. 3. Display the obstructed reflections: Select the Display the obstructed reflections check box if you want to display obstructed reflected signals. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.1 Displaying Reflection Atoll displays reflection areas along the profile and provides information about the interference generated by the reflected signal.e. if there is a reflection point within the reflection area. "Solutions Against Reflections" on page 215. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. For information on defining the height variation. Select Display Options from the context menu. Under For All Reflection Zones. For information on defining the range of k factor values. or the reflection point is out of the reflection area. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.e. 4. Red: The reflection point is within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. select the Reflection tab. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. Display the reflection plan: Select the Display the reflection plan check box in order to display the reflection slope. Therefore. The reflection does not create destructive interference. Reflection areas are represented with a hashed pattern and unobstructed reflected signals by orange lines. Orange: The reflection point is within the reflection area but the reflected signal is obstructed. In this section. Under Display tide levels. The context menu appears. select the Display tide levels check box in order to display the height variation due to tides above the sea water clutter category.6. Green: Either there is no reflection point. Under For the selected area. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. In the Profile Display Options dialogue. - 7. 7. For information on assigning clutter categorries to clutter classes in the propagation model properties. - 6. 4. To display reflection areas: 1. 2. see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151 Reflection point can have different locations as the k factor vary during the day. The context menu appears. Right-click the Profile tab. you can select the following options: Display the specular reflection point: Select the Display the specular reflection point check box if you want to display reflection areas along the link profile and unobstructed reflected paths. 2. The reflection does not create destructive interference. Then. "Analysing Reflections" on page 212. it is not obstructed). see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies: Select the Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies check box if you want to display the reflection zone regardless of clutter categories. The option is automatically selected after you have displayed reflections as explained in the paragraph above. Obstructed reflected signals are represented with orange dashed lines. Interference can be destructive when the reflection point is located within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. The reflection zone is determined from antenna heights and ground altitude at the transmitter and receiver sites. you have to check if this zone is a reflection area and in this case. Atollcolours the pattern and highlights the corresponding unobstructed reflected path if there is one. Click one reflection area.

"Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. The context menu appears. 7. In addition. Link Specifications: You will find data on the studied microwave link: Longitude: The site position on the x-axis. Select the Report tab. fresh and sea water clutter categories. 6. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu.99% of the average year in millimetre per hour. Grazing angle of reflected ray: The grazing angle and the incidence angle of the reflected path on the reflection slope plane are complementary angles. Angle at A between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site A. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Water Vapour Density: The water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. The Report tab contains the following sections: Summary: The Summary part provides information on the impact of the reflection on the direct signal. Frequency Band: The operating frequency band selected in the microwave link properties. Total Reflection Area Length: The length of the selected reflection zone and the total length including all reflection zones into brackets.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report Atoll provides detailed analysis of reflection areas and their impact on microwave links. 7. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. the profile should not include repeaters. It depends on the roughness.6. 3. The context menu appears. Right-click the reflection area. or intermediate. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. the length of the link and the transmitter antenna height above the reflection area. Length: The microwave link length. Right-click the Profile tab. tree covered and cryosphere clutter categories. Ground Type: It can be either scattering.Atoll User Manual Note: Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles. Geoclimatic Parameters: You will find geoclimatic parameters defined for the studied microwave link: Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - - - Reflection area geometry: The Reflection area geometry part contains the following information: 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .atl document. Atoll recommends some solutions to minimise the reflection effects such as changing the receiver antenna tilt or implementing diversity techniques. 2. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. Critical specular reflection point: This indicates if there is a reflection point for the selected reflection zone. Coordinate System: The display coordinate system set in the . Height: The site altitude. Terrain Roughness Factor: The terrain roughness factor. or reflecting. Effective Coefficient Reflection: The reflection coefficient of the reflection area. i. If required.. Relative Humidity: The relative humidity in %. 4. 5.6. Temparature: The average temperature (in °C) of the zone in which the microwave link operates. To display a detailed analysis of reflection areas: 1.e. Humidity Type: The humidity type depends on the clutter category. "Very dry" is considered for built-up area and dry ground clutter categories.2 Analysing Reflections In this section. For more information on how the ground type is determined. Latitude: The site position on the y-axis.01% of the average year): The rainfall observed 99. "Water or very wet" is considered for wet terrains. Click a reflection area. Earth Curvature Factor (k): The k factor defined in the Profile tab. it displays optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for the k factor defined in the Profile tab. Geoclimatic factor (K): The K factor which models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. see the Technical Reference Guide. "Slightly wet or moderatly dry" is used for rural open. Rainfall Rate (exceeded during 0.2. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. 7.

9% of time. The signal is attenuated by the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and because it is reflected by the ground (Attenuation due to ground reflection). BBER) to be considered for the link. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. if the reflected signal is obstructed. availability model. Antennas: Main. The signal attenuation is due to the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and refractivity (Attenuation due to refractivity).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Angle at B between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site B. Surface Reflection Coefficient: The surface reflection factor. you can select the following information: - - Calculation Parameters: Under Calculation Parameters. you can select the following information: - - Transmission: Under Transmission. Climatic Zone: The climatic zone as defined in the link properties. Conductivity: The terrain conductivity in S/m. and if the reflected and direct signals arrive in phase. you select the corresponding check boxes: Summary: Under Summary. calculation on the diversity antenna. Specular Reflection Factor: The specular reflection factor. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. <Custom Fields>: The custom fields available in Links table. Sites: Sites related parameters such as the pylon height. For information on configuring the channel to be studied. Permitivity: The terrain permitivity. Fog: the fog intensity in %. Median Value of the k factor: the k factor value observed 50% of time. Refractivity Gradient: The refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface (in N-units/km) as defined in the link properties. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. Polarisation: The antenna polarisation. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. you can select the following information: - Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 213 . you can select the following information: - - Geoclimatic Parameters: Under Geoclimatic Parameters. ESR. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. The value is calculated according to refractivity conditions defined for the link. the support type and custom fields. Total Attenuation: The total attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. BBER) to be considered for the link. Calculation Methods: The calculation methods used (propagation model. <Field Selection>: Atoll recommends optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for three k factor values (kmin. Quality Objectives: The quality objectives (SESR. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Maximum Possible Attenuation: The strongest attenuation experienced by the direct signal at the receiver side. This is the sum of the attenuation due to antenna discrimination and the attenuation due to ground reflection. Rain Height (0°C isotherm): The height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. Terrain Irregularity: The terrain irregularity. Percentage of time when the refractivity gradient (<100m) is <-100N-units/km: The percentage of the average year where the refractivity gradient value of -100N-units/km is not exceeded. Calculated Channel: The calculated channel. kavg and kmax). you can select the following information: Detailed Study: You can read if the specular reflection point is within the reflection area. The value is read in the Geoclimatic Parameters file. The value is defined in the link properties. quality model. Diversity Frequency: The second channel frequency when diversity frequency is used. - - Additional results appear if. space diversity and frequency diversity). - Link Specifications: Under Link Specifications. Effective Earth Curvature Factor (ke at 99.9%): the k factor value observed 99. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. Environment Type: The terrain type as defined in the link properties. Attenuations: The Attenuations part contains the following results calculated for the k factor value defined in the Profile tab: Reflected Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Equipment: The equipment parameters for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB). Direct Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the direct signal at the receiver side. kavg and kmax). Atmospheric Pressure: The atmospheric pressure (hPa) as defined in the link properties. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Availability Objectives: The availability objectives (SESR. Terrain Profile: The terrain profile. diversity and back antenna properties for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB) and repeaters (SiteP and SiteQ). ESR. <Field Selection>: The results listed after can be calculated for three k factor values (kmin. when configuring the report as explained in "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. Climatic Factor: The geoclimatic factor as defined in the link properties. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab.

7. a. Select the paragraph alignment by selecting Align Left. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. If the difference exceeds or equals 1. Click the Contents tab. To display a result. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. c. The Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue appears. click the Reset button. Click the Actions button and select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. select the reflection area to be considered in the reflection analysis: 214 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can access and modify the global calculation parameters and the microwave link parameters.6. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Tau(kmax)-Tau(kmin): The difference between Tau calculated for kmax and Tau calculated for kmin. or Align Right. The Report Configuration dialogue appears.2.6. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. 3. clear its check box. If the difference is lower than 1. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. then there is no minimum (destructive interference at the receiver side due to the reflected signal) that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity can be avoided. Reflection area geometry: Under Reflection area geometry. To configure the reflection analysis report: 1. Tau corresponds to the difference in path length between direct and reflected signals expressed in wavelength. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. Under Analysis Mode. To restore the initial style. Click the AaBbYyZz button to change the font. then there is at least one minimum that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity may be implemented depending on how well the signal is reflected and whether there is significant discrimination against surface reflections from one or both of the antennas. you can select the following information: 7. c. 5. Zone Location: The distances from Site A at which the reflection area starts and ends. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. d. b. 2. Reflected path delay: The delay of the reflected path in ns. d. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Antenna heights above the reflection plan: The antenna heights at SiteA and SiteB above the reflection plan. Centred. Path difference (direct/reflected) (m): The difference in path length between direct and reflected signals. 3. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Location of the specular reflection point: The distance of the specular reflection point from Site A.2.Atoll User Manual Divergence Factor: The divergence factor. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. you can select the following information: - - Attenuations: Under Attenuations. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. 2. a. Click the Actions button and select Configure Report. In addition. kavg and kmax). kavg and kmax). select its check box. 4. To hide a result.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report You can configure the display parameters of the reflection analysis report to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. b. Click a style. Click the Style tab. select the Reset button.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the reflection analysis. To define reflection analysis parameters: 1. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Click OK.

2. The context menu appears. Right-click the Profile tab. 6. Atoll makes the reflection analysis on the selected reflection area. 2. for different k factor values (kmin. For more information on these calculation methods. The transmission frequency. By default.3 Solutions Against Reflections At the end of the reflection analysis. you can identify whether ground reflection is a problem for the link. For more information on these calculation methods. 3. 4. Under Amplitude calculation of the indirect ray. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. effects of reflections can be minimized by carefully positioning the antenna heights as explained in "Studying Reflection" on page 210. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. select the method to be used to calculate antenna heights above the reflection plan. see the Technical Reference Guide. 6. Atoll provides you with a tool you can use to check whether the recommended antenna height and frequency separations are valid over a range of k factor values. 5. To access the global calculation parameters: 1. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. for different k factor values (kmin. You can also display the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path as a function of: The k factor. To check the recommended antenna height and frequency separations: 1. or by using diversity techniques with the antenna/frequency separations recommended in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. the Standard Deviation method and the Interdecile Range method. kmax and the kavg) and receiver antenna heights. Under Effect due to tide level above sea water. Click the Actions button and select Calculation Parameters. kmax Factor: the highest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. Global Calculation on all reflection areas: If you select this option. 7. You can choose between the Root Mean Square method. 4. Atoll takes into account all reflection areas along the profile in the reflection analysis. select the range of k factor values: kmin Factor: the lowest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. For more information on these calculation methods. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 215 . for different receiver antenna heights and transmission frequencies. 2. select the method to be used to calculate terrain height irregularity. 7. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with equivalent reflection coefficient. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with linear regression on the area.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Calculation on the selected reflection area: If you select this option. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Atoll displays the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path (i. To access the microwave link parameters: 1. Under Antenna heights above the reflection plan.e. In this case. You can also use it to optimise the height and frequency separations. 8. see the Technical Reference Guide. Click a reflection area. Under Refractivity. see the Technical Reference Guide. Under Terrain Height Irregularity. by using the antenna discrimination capabilities and tilting the receiver antenna as indicated in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. 5. kmax and the kavg) and transmission frequencies. Click the Actions button and select Link Properties. Click the Actions button and select Display Options.6. select the method to be used to calculate the indirect signal amplitude. 9. the attenuation of the reflected path compared to the direct path) as a function of the antenna height. select the Take into account height variations of check box and define the corresponding height. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. Click OK.

Min Bound: The lower value on the horizontal axis. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network. 5. Select the Display tab. Diversity Antenna. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Max Bound: The upper value on the horizontal axis. They are automatically calculated by Atoll. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations.120: Study of Reflection and Diversity – Attenuation Graph 7. define the k factor values. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. Click OK. Under Vertical Axis. Select the Variable Definition tab. the k factor and the transmission frequency. Diversity Frequency. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. Thus. Under Transmission Frequency Selection. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears.e. Atoll displays the keff factor at 99% (i. Under Horizontal Axis. 8. 2. Under Receiver Antenna Height Selection. It is common experience that such modifications in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the initial design of the same network. For information. to be considered for the analysis. the median k factor value). You can choose between the receiver antenna height. then divide each plan into a high segment and a low segment. you can select the following: Ordinate: Select what you want to display on the horizontal axis. either select the Automatic Bound Calculation check box in order to let Atoll automatically determine the upper and lower values of the vertical axis. Right-click the Profile tab. 9. 8. 3. 10. or keep clear the Automatic Bound Calculation check box and define these values manually (Max Attenuation and Min Attenuation). The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most important objective. 11. For each new link created in any environment. kavg and kmax.separation) and the other height (main antenna height + separation) values. The context menu appears. The optimal separations calculated for the different k factor values are displayed. define the antenna height values. to be considered for the analysis. each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies. to be considered for the analysis. 4. Click OK. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity frequency (main frequency + separation) and the other frequency values (main frequency + 2*separation). The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity antenna height (main antenna height . Click the Actions button and select Display Options. Under Graph Selection. define the transmission frequency values. To optimise the antenna height and frequency separations: 1. 10. Atoll 7. The optimal separations for the different k factor values are displayed. 7. You can redo the analysis with these values. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. select the graphs to be displayed and how you want to colour them. Click a reflection area. the k factor value not exceeded 99% of the average year) and the keff factor at 50% (i. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. 11. Main Frequency and Other Frequency.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. Under k Factor Selection. 9. A logical approach is to define a number of specific frequency plans. kmin.e. Main Antenna and Other Height. 6. 216 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

4.e. results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table. Right-click the Links folder. 3. 2. The Channel Distribution table contains the following information.7. with each pair having minimum separations. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities. If the transmitter frequency is in the high block. 7. 6. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. "Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search" on page 218. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 217 . Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select Interference and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu. The context menu appears.. Click OK. The context menu appears. To hide the site parities using the context menu: 1. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. Right-click the Links folder. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (in dpi).7. Atoll takes into consideration the sites of microwave links which are active. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. filtered (i. When an assignment is made. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. Right-click the Links folder. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 5. Select Interference > Channels Distribution per Site > Display on the Map from the context menu. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. "Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products" on page 220 7. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. and which intersect the computation zone. 5.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities You can verify the parity of sites either on the map or in a report. 2. In this section.1. 7. "Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser" on page 219. The context menu appears. 7. ) ) 3. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs. In this section. Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. You can also hide the site parities using the context menu. the following are explained: • • • • • "Checking Microwave Link Site Parities" on page 217. To create a report displaying site parities: 1. 4. Choose an icon for the different cases. 8. you can hide them by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button again. To perform a site parity check and display the results on the map: 1. that are selected by the current filter parameters). 2.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map Atoll enables you to view the site parities on the map and thereby detect any possible parity conflicts. the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments.2 Creating a Report on Site Parities Atoll enables you to create a report displaying site parities. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities. the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa. 4. You can also open the Channel Distribution dialogue using the toolbar by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button. "Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 218.1. Once Atoll has finished checking site parities. Click OK to start the calculations. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Once the site parities are displayed on the map. 6.7. Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. Select Interference. 3. the following are explained: • • "Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 217 "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 217. 9.

3. select the Same Sub-band Only check box. Select a Frequency Band. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link: 1. The Search Tool allows you to view channel reuse on the map. Links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. 7. Site: The name of the site. links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue and all others are displayed in grey. links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple.7. 9. or both). To find a channel using the Search Tool: 1.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse In Atoll. 6. Parity: The parity of the site. see "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. 2.7. 3. The Search Tool window provides you with the following options: To restore the initial microwave link colours: Click the Reset Display button in the window. Select the MW Channel tab. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dialogue appears. Click the Conditions tab and define the following: Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A Site B.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands.. Links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. If you only want the selected Channel to be displayed. If you selected the Same Sub-band Only check box. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the site has a multiple parity. Select a Channel. Click Search. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green and all other links are displayed in grey. 2. If you only want the links with the selected frequency Sub-band to be considered. All other links are displayed in grey. You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green. Define in which half-band (Lower or Upper) you want to search for the channel. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. 218 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select a Sub-band. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box. 7. Site B . Links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue. To display all channel arrangements available for the selected frequency band: Click the Frequency Plans button and resize the Search Tool window by dragging the lower border of the window. The Search Tool window appears. 8. Click View > Search Tool. you can use the Search Tool to search for channels. Links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. Select Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. select the Co-channel Only check box. 5. 7. This channel search is performed according to the interference received or transmitted per channel. Longitude: The longitude of the site. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map.e. links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search The semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a definable cost function enabling you to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. The context menu appears. Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only.e. For more information.. Latitude: The latitude of the site. 4.Site A. Links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple.

This implies that the best available channels. For example. The context menu appears.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Under Channels to Study: Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from to the frequency band of the microwave link being studied. the values must be separated with either a comma. are the ones listed on top of the list. - The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser Atoll can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling you to allocate unused or less used channels where required. by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. 2. 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 219 . The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. Under Channel Weightings. set the parameter to 3000%. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. Select Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu. only the peak value is displayed on the graph.121: The I Level on the Band tab . The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites. this is the percentage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The red line shows the total noise level received on the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel. use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels. Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned to the reception site).7. Click Calculate to launch the calculations. - 5. The channels to be analysed: Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated. or a space. Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on. You can enter or paste a list of channels. or horizontal and vertical). If there are more than one interfering signals. Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value. or a semi-colon. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and each defined polarisation (either horizontal. in terms of the related costs. If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated. The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. entering 20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22.Received Interference Levels Option Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the microwave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. It is then possible through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking the Commit button. 7.121): Figure 7. always off or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. You can also enter a range of channels available. Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal. you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links. Through this graph. or vertical. Click the Parameters tab and define: The earth curvature factor (k factor). The minimum threshold degradation. You can locate the channels on which there is the least or no interference and allocate these "free" channels where required. To open the spectrum analyser: 1. In order to take into account all the potential interferers. select Restrict the list of potential channels and define the channels available.

5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products Intermodulation is caused by non-linear behaviour of the signal processing being used. Received interference levels: Select the Received interference levels option in order to display channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters.. i. You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied.Intermodulations Option Atoll shows the transmission and reception frequencies used by the studied site (i. i.Site A. Site A Site B or vice versa.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . For information on displaying the third-order intermodulation products. - - 220 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . then the output is a signal which includes a number of integer multiples of the input frequency (i..122: The I Level on the Band tab . For information on displaying the received interference levels. Frequencies are represented by vertical lines and reported on the horizontal axis. see “Global Parameters” on page 156. . Site A if you selected Site A . Select Planning and Intermodulation Products from the context menu.A snapshot of the I Levels on the Band tab.Atoll User Manual You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. 2f1. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 3f1. Site A Site B or vice versa. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. The report contains the following information: .122): Figure 7. f1). For information on global parameters.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B .e. 5f1.e. see “Global Parameters” on page 156. meaning that if the input of a non-linear system is a signal of a single frequency (e. The blue lines indicate the frequencies used for transmission. Site A if you selected Site A . The signals of different frequencies are mixed together. i. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters.e. see “Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser” on page 219. These new frequencies are called intermodulation products (IMPs). forming additional signals at frequencies that are not. in general.. at harmonic frequencies of either. .). . etc. 2. For information on global parameters. green lines show the frequencies used for reception and red lines represent the third-order intermodulation products. Only frequenies within the frequency band of the studied microwave link are represented. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map.Site A) and calculates the third-order intermodulation products for each transmission channel of the frequency half-band of the microwave link. Atoll can calculate third-order intermodulation products. Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab.The transmission frequencies used by the site. Atoll displays a tool tip when you place the mouse cursor on each vertical line. see “Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products” on page 220. .7.e. and can therefore interfere with the desired behaviour. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.The studied site. Intermodulation occurs when the input to a non-linear system is composed of two or more frequencies. The context menu appears.. To calculate third-order intermodulation products: 1. They are important because they fall within the vicinity of the original frequency components.The reception frequencies used by the site.The third-order intermodulation products belonging to the studied frequency band.g. Intermodulations: Select the Intermodulations option in order to display third-order intermodulation products. Actions > Report: Click Actions and then select Report from the menu in order to display a detailed report on the calculated intermodulation products. - - 7. .e... 4f1.The studied microwave link and the selected hop. Non-linear systems generate harmonics.

You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). "Displaying Interference on the Map" on page 226. 2. microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequency band of the microwave link being studied.. The context menu appears.8 Analysing Interference Atoll includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. received interferer signal threshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab. Atoll calculates all the microwave links in the group that are active. and intersect the computation zone. transmitter mask. "Using IRF in Interference Calculations" on page 224. Atoll uses it. In this section. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. Potential interferers. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs.e. capacity and modulation.. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. and receiver mask graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs. "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224.1 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. or the theoretical graphs if not.1. IRFs defined on the IRF table if available T/I curve. always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation. However. Atoll also considers the adjacency of frequency bands. 7. or modulation are not the same. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. For information on the computation zone. The following parameters are taken into account when calculating interference: • • • • • Interferer ATPC can be user-defined as always on. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. 7. If so. Right-click on the Links folder. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group of links. Co-channel and adjacent channel interference. By default.e. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. the interference in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. If the equipment manufacturer. filtered (i. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment. 7.8. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. i. among all microwave links in the network. that are selected by the current filter parameters). capacity. When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 221 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 222. Atoll searches for potential interferers in the network operating in the same frequency band. Otherwise. "Managing Interference Calculation Validity" on page 226. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 221 . are the active and filtered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone and whose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. If so.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. you can change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Modules tab. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). "Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links" on page 225. Polarisation and equipment signatures. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference.8. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. You can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius. In this section. 2. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference.

9. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. Figure 7.Atoll User Manual 4. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Right-click on the Links folder. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. Click OK. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue.123: IRF table 5. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. 7.124). Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu.8. 2. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 7. Figure 7.123). The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 7. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. 222 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 6. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. The context menu appears.123).124: IRF record Properties dialogue 8. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 7. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list.1. 4. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.

Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. b. The context menu appears. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. 8. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 223 . You can now define an IRF graph. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Select Add Record from the context menu. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. c.125: IRF Setting dialogue 5. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Click OK. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. d. Select Delete from the context menu. A dialogue appears. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. 6. b. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. 7. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. b. Under Enter graph values. delete an IRF graph. The context menu appears.

worst month quality. locations. visualise the results in the form of reports and tables. In this case. To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. heights. shielding losses. 9. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. rain intensity (exceeding 0. the channel. Else. shared losses. connection losses. site names. heights. If the equipment manufacturer. the polarisation.8. polarisation at both sites.Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions.Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. availability model. the corresponding frequency. gains and diameters. it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. The results are displayed in the following tabs: Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over any given microwave link.Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. connection losses.Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. and altitudes for both extremities. The context menu appears. Under Transmitter Filter. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). If defined. 7. overflow thresholds. ATPC effects. earth curvature factor (k). shielding losses. PL percentage. the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calculation. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment. the port circulator and attenuator losses. digital hierarchy employed. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antennas details such as the models. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. 2. tilts. climatic factor. . temperature. capacity or modulation are not the same. it uses it. a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. 7. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses. . port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses.8.reception equipment pair in the IRF table. Select Planning >Interference Details from the context menu.Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. Finally. average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Click OK. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. . or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment.01% of time). capacities and configurations. and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively. tilts. thermal fade margin. It proceeds as follows: 1. transmitter powers. whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. Atoll first checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment . effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. the transmission and reception port numbers. A dialogue containing details of the interference analysis appears. Under Reception Filter. 224 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. capacity and modulation. passive repeater gains (if any). and waveguides and cable losses. length. port connection losses. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. minimal channel bandwidths.Summary: A summary of the link being studied. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to calculate the IRF graph. total losses comprising filter losses. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. 2. azimuths. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. . quality model. modulation used. its operating frequency band. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link.Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. azimuths. shared losses. or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not. g. f. Atoll uses T/I curves in order to calculate the IRF graph.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link Atoll enables you to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. data rates. thermal noise thresholds. water vapour density. diameters and near fields.Atoll User Manual c. d. e. or the theoretical graphs if not. . repeaters (if any). It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer.2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations As explained in "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. gains. . The report includes the following information: . antennas used at both sites with their respective models. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz).

and availability objectives (SESR. Define the content of the report: a. rain attenuation. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. To define the content of the interference report: 1. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. minimum threshold degradation. The context menu appears. Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control. - - - - - - - Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. outage probability due to failures for the average year. These results include the outage probability. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the total attenuation). the outage probability. The Properties dialogue appears. the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. from top to bottom. space diversity and frequency diversity). To select a field to be included in the report. Propagation: The nominal received signal level. 7. ESR (required). for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management interference. interfered useful bandwidth) and results of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold degradation. details for the average year (rain fading. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions. Interference results are displayed in the form of a report whose the content you can define. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. BBER). the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. Right-click the Links folder. free space loss. ESR (required). Select Interference > Properties from the context menu. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. These results include the outage probability. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. the outage probability. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. diffraction losses. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. 4. the following are explained: • • "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207. select the fields that you want to display in the report. 7. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. The Field Selection dialogue appears.8. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). losses due to water vapour. total interference in rain and C/I). fading due to discrimination reduction). for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account.8. you can define the content of the interference report.4. total interference in clear-air. selective fading. nominal received carrier power level. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 225 . threshold degradation for rain.1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report Before calculating interference on multiple microwave links. enhancement forecast). In this section. In the Field Selection dialogue. ESR. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207. losses due to dry air. BBER (required)). b. BBER). correlation area. maximum distance. fadings due to discrimination reduction. Click Add. if space and frequency diversities are used. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate interference for a group of microwave links simultaneously or over the entire network of microwave links. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. BBER (required)). These results include availability of hot standby. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. quality objectives (SESR. ESR. To change the order of the fields. Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied. 3.

2. 3. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. Select Interference > Calculate from the context menu. once calculations have been performed for all the links. For the first two reasons. you can display the result on the map. Right-click the Links folder. you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. you must force Atoll to recalculate.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. The details are displayed in a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. Click OK. 2. The context menu appears. In the last case (e. performed on a group of microwave links. © Forsk 2010 226 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited . 7. If geographic data maps have been updated. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) in the toolbar.g.4. Notes: • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. Click the microwave link on the map. if you added a new clutter class map). If microwave link properties have been modified. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. So.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links You can Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links. 3. 1. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. b.. Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. 7. The context menu appears.8. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. by double-clicking the record in the report. The next time you configure an interference report. Atoll displays the interference report. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. You can also perform interference analysis over the entire network of microwave links. To display interference connections on the map 1. To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. Atoll removes existing calculations.8. and recalculates interference. are saved in the Atoll document.Atoll User Manual c. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double-clicking the corresponding record in the Victim/Interferer tabs. Atoll removes existing calculations. To force Atoll to recalculate interference: 1. including valid ones. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu.8. You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Reinitialise. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. 2.6 Displaying Interference on the Map After calculating interference on a microwave link. You can view details of each microwave link. 5. 7. including valid ones.

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on the map. 5. 4. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears. 3.1.1 Advanced Configuration Point-to-Multipoint Links A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. or editing the point-to-multipoint links table. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. You can hide them by clicking the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) again. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select if you want to make them visible. created automatically at the location you clicked on the map.9. you can use the tool tip to show further information about each interference connection by placing the cursor on it. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse" on page 231 7. and passive repeaters. Click the New PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. The pointer changes to ( ). You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active" on page 229. 1. 4. You can create a point-to-multipoint link in several different ways: • • • using the mouse. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link. "Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. Once you have selected a frequency band. The context menu appears. transmitters.9. The Interference dialogue opens. Right-click on the Links folder. 4. "Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties" on page 228. Atoll creates a new site where you click. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which can contain repeaters) connected to a hub. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. When the interference connections are displayed on the map. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. 3. To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse: 1. Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and outwards pointing arrows respectively. 2. 7.9 7. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ). Click the map at each place you want to insert a new link. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • "Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 227. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. If you do not click an existing site. 2. 3. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. 2. "Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 229. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub" on page 230. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. Select New from the context menu. The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites. In this section. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 227 . "Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally" on page 229. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites. To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder: 1.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link In Atoll. using the point-to-multipoint link folder. but can be modified.

Frequency Band. and Site.9. Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their attributes. the following are explained: • • "Modifying Global Properties" on page 228 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 228. Click OK. d. b.1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. The context menu appears. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. 3. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters. 2. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.9. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. to manage the legend. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents. and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool 6. 228 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . of the point-to-multipoint table. 5. Once you have selected the hub site. 6. button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder.2 Modifying Individual Properties To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. 6. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230 To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint table: 1.2. . Select Open Table from the context menu. Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link. Click OK.9. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens. 4. labels on the map. 7. The Point to Multipoint table appears. including user-defined fields. sort.Atoll User Manual Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link.1 Modifying Global Properties To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally: 1. 5. 7. By default. Click the c. ). Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears.1. In this section. A global setting is applied to all the filtered point-to-multipoint links. 3. Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder. and filter tools. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties You can modify point-to-multipoint link properties either individually or globally. The following fields must be filled: Name. You can also organise point-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears. 4.1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX". 7. 2. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. where "X" increments with the creation of each new point-to-multipoint link. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ).2. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link: On the Data tab of the Explorer window: a.

Click OK.4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally To map microwave links to point-to-multipoint links globally: 1.9. 3. and delete microwave links. 2. The Properties dialogue appears. Select the Links tab. Links: The Links tab lets you add. and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 7. containing all the pointto-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. sort. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. An Other Properties tab is available if you have added fields to the Point-to-Multipoint table. Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on the map. The point-tomultipoint icon changes ( Note: ). In this table. 6. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 5. You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change.9. For information on creating links. Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon.1. 5. 2. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Select one of the following: Activate Links: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active. and filter tools. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( 3. 7.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. The Properties dialogue appears. Deactivate Links: Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive. In the Explorer window.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Do not select the site icon ( ). The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( 3. b. edit. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the PMP hub whose activity status you want to set. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. 2. delete. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). The context menu appears. select a link. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 229 . Right-click the new point-to-multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. The PMP/Link Mapping table opens. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link.1.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management On the map: a. 7. 2. 3. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link: 1. In the row with the new row icon ( ). 4. you can modify. 7.9. ) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.1.

The microwave link is deleted. On the map.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. 2. Select Delete from the context menu. and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas. To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( 3. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link. b. 2. click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse: 1. 5. select the microwave link you want to delete. 7. 2.9. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 230 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .9.1. Or a. the height. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. 6. However. Click the Expand button ( c. be careful to select the line representing the point-to-multipoint link.Atoll User Manual 7. 7. select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. The context menu appears. Consequently. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. On the map. Deleting a point-to-multipoint link from the table does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a point-to-multipoint link: 1. after the point-to-multipoint has been created. 3. You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-to-Multipoint table. The pointer shape changes ( ). In a pointto-multipoint link.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub When a microwave link consists of only two sites. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. 7. Select Add a Link from the context menu. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-tomultipoint hub antenna. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link: 1. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.1.9. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. azimuth. 4.1. Click the Expand button ( 3. When selecting a point-to-multipoint link. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted. On the map. b. Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created. For information on creating links.1. it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete: Either a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Do not select the site icon ( ). ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. d. Select Delete from the context menu. 2. 4. The context menu appears.9. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link.

8. ) and you can © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 231 .10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse To use the mouse to adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box. the point-to-multipoint link antennas may need to be adjusted accordingly. and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna. 7. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( now rotate it manually. azimuth. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas. A dialogue appears with the recalculated height. 2. In the "Antenna" subsection. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 9. 6. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth.1.9.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 5. click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub antenna on the link antennas. 7.

Atoll User Manual 232 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

examples 64 formatting column headers 45 formatting table columns 45 freezing columns 46 hiding columns 46 importing data 50 moving columns 46 opening 41 opening record properties from table 44 pasting data 47 printing 52 restoring after filtering 64 sorting 60 B backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 BER graphs creating (MW) 136 budget configuring report (MW) 206 multiple microwave links. adjusting 230 point-to-multipoint link. printing (MW) 126 antennas. semi-automatic (MW) 218 clearance. defining 156 unfreezing 46 computation zone drawing 30 editing 34 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. calculating for 204 C cables creating (MW) 137 microwave 137 channel search. editing (MW) 125 archiving all modifications to the database 87 only site data to the database 87 automatic backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 availability objectives microwave links.Index Index A antenna antenna patterns. displaying for microwave links 194 column headers formatting 45 columns changing width 45 displaying 46 freezing 46 hiding 46 moving 46 © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 233 . adjusting automatically (MW) 200 heights. importing (MW) 125. 139 compatibility with equipment. adjusting (MW) 200 heights. optimising (MW) 200 microwave 123 microwave antenna properties 125 microwave. creating from 30 Connection Properties 85 context menu 17 renaming objects 17 coordinate system 81 setting 82 coordinates. assistant (MW) 139. displaying using hot spot zone 31 coverage predictions restricting sites studied (MW) 192 cursors 40 CW Measurement Analysis Tool printing data 56 D Data tab 15 data tables adding a field 42 changing column width 45 changing row height 45 copying data 47 deleting a field 43 displaying columns 46 editing 43 exporting data 49 filtering 60 filtering by selection 62 filtering by several criteria 63 filtering. creating 123 point-to-multipoint link. 140 heights. calculating for 206. defining 33 report. displaying using focus zone 31 report. 132 changing relative position on the map 20 compatibility with equipment (MW) 138. copying (MW) 126 antenna patterns. searching by 73 coverage prediction exporting results 37 geogrphic export zone. 225 single microwave link. adjusting with the mouse 231 single antenna patterns.

discrete values 22 display type. 139 compatibility with antennas. assistant (MW) 139. 140 importing (MW) 132 transceiver.Atoll User Manual sorting by one column 61 sorting by several columns 61 unfreezing columns 46 viewing properties 42 XML files. value intervals 22 display coordinate system 81 Distance Measurement tool 28 document creating from database 79. unique 22 display type. exporting to 51 XML files. properties of (MW) 131 Explorer window 15 Data tab 15 Geo tab 15 layers 16 Modules tab 15 using tabs 15 G Geo tab 15 geographic export zone creating 33 Fit to Map Window 34 importing 34 polygon. 84 creating from template 79. creating from 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 folder configuration 69 applying a saved configuration 70 creating 70 deleting 71 exporting 70 importing 70 reapplying current configuration 70 frequency bands long-haul (MW) 145 medium-haul (MW) 146 microwave 146 short-haul (MW) 146 frequency planning (MW) 216 frequency sub-bands microwave 147 E equipment compatibility with antennas (MW) 138. 71 with subfolders 71 filtering zone deleting 33 drawing 29 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. see "templates" DTM maps representing different areas 111 data tables by several criteria 63 examples 64 restoring after filtering 64 using a polygon 29. importing from 52 database archiving all modifications 87 archiving only site data 87 connecting to 84 Connection Properties 85 creating a document from 84 refreshing document 86 resolving data conflicts 88 working with 83 digital hierarchy 132 display changing properties 21 defining display type 22 display type. 57 by several properties 58 examples 59 with subfolders 71 F field adding to a table 42 deleting from a table 43 filter site list. 80 geographic data 79 information needed to create 79 microwave data 79 microwave equipment 79 refreshing from the database 86 setting basic parameters 81 document templates. creating from 30 Find toolbar 72 focus zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 polygon. using for 69 filtering data tables by selection 62 H hot spot zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 234 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . creating from 34 grouping 56 by a property 56. using for 69 transmitter list.

editing 125 site parity 217 site parity. adjusting automatically 200 antenna heights. calculating for single link 204 budget. 221 using assistant (MW) 135. 221 IRF. creating 137 calculation parameters 156 calculation parameters. 178. see "interference reduction factor" L label 23 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 layers 16 legend adding object type 24 displaying 24 displaying Legend window 29 printing Legend window 56 line of sight area intersection of areas (MW) 184 studying (MW) 176. analysing 224 interference on several links. intersection 184 LOS between sites. 214 classes. 132 availability objectives. creating 154 classes. 140 interference reduction factor (MW) 133. copying 126 antenna patterns. optimising 200 antenna patterns. 221 LOS between sites. mapping simple links to 210 multi-hop. defining 155 reliability analysis 203 required margins. printing 126 © Forsk 2010 antenna properties 125 antenna/equipment compatibility 138.Index I interference analysis several links (MW) 226 single link (MW) 224 interference analysis (MW) 221 interference reduction factor table (MW) 134. 139. defining 156 grouping by site 58 interference analysis 221 interference on a single link. setting 82 measuring distances on the map 28 medium-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 microwave error performance events 155 microwave error performance objectives 155 microwave error performance parameters 155 Microwave Link Analysis printing 56 Microwave Link toolbar 75 microwave links 173 antenna heights. creating a report on 217 site parity. calculating for multiple links 206. modifying 154 clearance. mapping links to 229 profile analysis 193 quality objectives. 139 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 139. analysing 226 interference reduction factor 133.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 multi-hop links. configuring report 206 cables 137 cables. defining 156 budget. 179 microwave ITU-R P. 140 antennas 123 antennas. displaying 194 equipment. 178. creating 208 passive repeater 201 passive repeater. studying 176. 179 line of sight area (MW) 176 lines editing 34 link. point-to-multipoint. 225 budget. importing 132 error performance events 155 error performance objectives 155 error performance parameters 155 finding by site 58 frequency bands 146 frequency planning 216 frequency sub-bands 147 global properties. see point-to-multipoint links Location Finder searching by coordinates 73 searching by text property 73 long-haul frequency bands (MW) 145 M manufacturers (MW) 123 map centring on a selected object 28 exporting as image 40 measuring distances 28 moving 27 printing 52 refreshing display 72 saving as image 39 Map toolbar 74 measurement units. inserting (MW) 203 performance objectives 154 point-to-multipoint link 227 point-to-multipoint links. calculating 204 restricting sites studied 192 semi-automatic channel search 218 simple link. displaying on the map 217 sorting by site 58 spectrum analyser 219 studying LOS between sites 176 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 235 . creating 190 simple link. setting as active 206 simple links 185 single antenna patterns. modifying 205. adjusting 200 antenna heights. importing 125. creating 123 antennas.

452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 Microwave Propagation Model. mapping to 210 reliability analysis 210 multipoint link. see point-to-multipoint link multi-user environment 83 O objects changing transparency 23 deleting 17 displaying 16 displaying properties 18 grouping 56 grouping by a property 56. 57 switching between property dialogues 18 236 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . adjusting with the mouse 231 creating 227 deleting 230 deleting a link from 230 global properties 228 links. 153 properties changing display 21 grouping objects by 56.Atoll User Manual template field. examples 59 hiding 16 label 23 tip text 24 visibility scale 23 P Page Setup. using as 34 printing zone. see "printing" Panoramic window 14. using as 31 geographic export zone. adding 191 template field. adjusting 230 antenna. defining parameters 151. creating 137 workflow 173 Microwave Propagation Model defining parameters 151. 230 creating 227 mapping links 229 properties 228 point-to-multipoint links 227 adding links 229 antenna. 57 grouping by several properties 58 grouping. using as 54 using as computation zone 30 using as filter 29. creating from 54 profile analysis microwave 193 options (MW) 194 printing (MW) 195 reflections. modifying 191 template. 153 microwave radio links template 79 Modules tab 15 multi-hop links 208 adding links to 209 creating 208 links. deleting 191 template field. creating 132 waveguides 137 waveguides. adding on the map 230 links. studying (MW) 210 Values tab (MW) 196 viewing (MW) 193 profile values exporting data 199 importing data 199 projection coordinate system 81 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 propagation model microwave ITU-R P. deleting 191 transceiver equipment. properties of 131 trunk types. 71 using as filtering zone 30 printing antenna patterns (MW) 126 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 56 data tables and reports 52 defining print layout 54 docking windows 56 Legend window 56 map 52 Microwave Link Analysis 56 Point Analysis window 56 print preview 55 profile analysis (MW) 195 recommendations 53 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 56 printing zone drawing 53 Fit to Map Window 54 importing 54 polygon. mapping to 229 properties 228 polygon deleting polygon filter 33 drawing a polygon filter 29 editing 34 focus zone. 27 passive microwave repeaters creating 202 performance objectives microwave links 154 Point Analysis window printing 56 points editing 34 point-to-multipoint link adding a link 229.

using as 69 site parity. inserting (MW) 203 reports printing 52 required margins. changing 23 trunk types. microwave 137 windows cascading 14 docking 14 floating 14 X XML © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 237 . 73 short-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 site moving on the map 19 moving to a higher location 19 properties. choosing 27 Search toolbar 75 searching for map objects 72. accessing from the Explorer window 18 properties. see "data tables" templates 79 deleting (MW) 191 field. adding (MW) 191 field. modifying (MW) 191 microwave radio links 79 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool printing 56 tip text 24 tool tips. deleting (MW) 191 field. microwave creating 132 R redo 72 reflection analysis report display (MW) 214 reflections studying (MW) 210 refresh 72 from the database 86 reliability analysis (MW) 203 renaming 17 default object names 17 repeaters passive repeater (MW) 201 passive repeater. calculating (MW) 204 row height changing 45 rulers displaying 28 S scale level.Index Q quality objectives microwave links. accessing from the map 18 site list 67 adding 68 adding site 68 creating 68 editing 69 filter. microwave link 217 creating a report 217 displaying on the map 217 sorting sorting tables by one column 61 sorting tables by several columns 61 with subfolders 71 spectrum analyser (MW) 219 Standard toolbar 74 station template creating (MW) 191 modifying (MW) 191 subfolders creating 71 U undo 72 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 user configuration 66 creating 67 exporting 67 importing 67 V Vector Edition toolbar 75 visibility scale 23 W waveguides creating (MW) 137 waveguides and cables. see "tip text" toolbar icons 74 Map 74 Microwave Link 75 Search 75 Standard 74 Vector Edition 75 transceiver equipment properties of (MW) 131 transmitter list 67 adding 68 adding transmitter 68 creating 68 editing 69 editing filter 69 transparency. microwave creating 137 waveguides. defining 155 T table columns formatting 45 tables.

Atoll User Manual exporting data tables to 51 importing data tables from 52 Z zooming choosing a scale 27 in on a specific area 27 238 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 239 .

No. IL 60606 .com .France Tel: +33 562 747 210 Fax: +33 562 747 211  US Office 200 South Wacker Drive . 3/F. 66 Jianzhong Road.8. P.forsk. rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac . Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone.User Manual Microwave Links version 2.USA Tel: +1 312 674 4846 Fax: +1 312 674 4847  China Office Suite 302.Suite 3100 Chicago. West Tower.3 AT283_UMM_E2 December 2010  Head Office 7. R. 510665. Guangzhou. of China Tel: +86 20 8553 8938 Fax: +86 20 8553 8285 www. Jiadu Commercial Building.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful